1702 PAC Display Users Guide
1702 PAC Display Users Guide
PAC DISPLAY
USERS GUIDE
PAC DISPLAY
USERS GUIDE
Wired+Wireless controllers and brains are licensed under one or more of the following patents: U.S. Patent No(s). 5282222,
RE37802, 6963617; Canadian Patent No. 2064975; European Patent No. 1142245; French Patent No. 1142245; British Patent
No. 1142245; Japanese Patent No. 2002535925A; German Patent No. 60011224.
Opto 22 FactoryFloor, groov, Optomux, and Pamux are registered trademarks of Opto 22. Generation 4, groov Server,
ioControl, ioDisplay, ioManager, ioProject, ioUtilities, mistic, Nvio, Nvio.net Web Portal, OptoConnect, OptoControl,
OptoDataLink, OptoDisplay, OptoEMU, OptoEMU Sensor, OptoEMU Server, OptoOPCServer, OptoScript, OptoServer,
OptoTerminal, OptoUtilities, PAC Control, PAC Display, PAC Manager, PAC Project, SNAP Ethernet I/O, SNAP I/O, SNAP OEM
I/O, SNAP PAC System, SNAP Simple I/O, SNAP Ultimate I/O, and Wired+Wireless are trademarks of Opto 22.
ActiveX, JScript, Microsoft, MS-DOS, VBScript, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Linux is a registered
trademark of Linus Torvalds. Unicenter is a registered trademark of Computer Associates International, Inc. ARCNET is a
registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation. Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric. Wiegand is a
registered trademark of Sensor Engineering Corporation. Nokia, Nokia M2M Platform, Nokia M2M Gateway Software, and
Nokia 31 GSM Connectivity Terminal are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Sony is a trademark of
Sony Corporation. Ericsson is a trademark of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson. CompactLogix, MicroLogix, SLC, and RSLogix
are trademarks of Rockwell Automation. Allen-Bradley and ControlLogix are a registered trademarks of Rockwell
Automation. CIP and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA.
groov includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org)
All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Opto 22
Automation Made Simple.
ii
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Welcome to PAC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PAC Display Basic and PAC Display Professional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Other PAC Display Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Documents and Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Product Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installing PAC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
iiiiii
Project Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project and Operator Interface Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Multiple Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting Dialog Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator and Runtime Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hiding the Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toolbox Coordinates and Object Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurator Draw Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redrawing an Active Draw Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Runtime Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing How the Main Window Appears in Runtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hiding the Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Runtime Project Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring How Draw Windows Appear in Runtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Runtime Event Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
34
34
35
35
35
35
36
37
37
37
38
38
39
39
39
40
40
iv
43
43
43
44
48
48
49
50
50
50
50
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
54
54
56
56
57
57
57
58
vv
vii
vii
viii
ixix
xixi
xii
Welcome to PAC Display, Opto 22s human-machine interface (HMI), alarming, and trending
software for Microsoft Windows operating systems. PAC Display works with Opto 22 control
programs (or strategies) running on Opto 22 industrial controllers.
PAC Display lets you easily create graphical, on-screen operator interfaces to monitor and manage
control applications running on Opto 22 industrial control engines. With PAC Display, you can
present real-time control engine information to the operator, set alarms to notify the operator of
changing data, visually track trends in the data using graphs, and securely log data to local or
remote computers. Additionally, you can configure the interface to allow a specified operator or
group of operators to change values such as alarm thresholds.
Take advantage of redundant Ethernet networking features in Opto 22 SNAP PAC controllers.
Have a PAC Display project connect to an Opto 22 controller that is running an OptoControl
strategy.
This users guide covers both PAC Display Basic and PAC Display Professional.
The Basic icon indicates features or functions that apply only to PAC Display Basic.
The Professional icon indicates features or functions that apply only to PAC Display Professional.
11
This guide assumes that you are already familiar with Microsoft Windows on your personal
computer, including how to use a mouse, standard menus and commands, and how to open, save,
and close files. If you are not familiar with Windows or your PC, see the documentation from
Microsoft and your computer manufacturer.
Heres what is in this users guide:
1: Welcome to PAC DisplayThis introductory chapter.
2: PAC Display TutorialA short lesson to get you up and running with a PAC Display project as
quickly as possible. Youll use a sample project to learn how to work with graphics, assign dynamic
attributes, and run a project.
3: What Is PAC Display?An introduction to PAC Display, basic design and programming
concepts, and PAC Display controls and windows.
4: Working with ProjectsAn explanation of what PAC Display projects are, the files theyre made
of, and how theyre organized.
5: Configuring Control Engines and TagsDetailed procedures on configuring control engines
and I/O from a PAC Control strategy for use in a PAC Display project.
6: Working with GraphicsDetailed steps for working with graphicsincluding assigning
animation attributesand the windows in which graphics appear.
7: Using Animated GraphicsCovers how to assign dynamic attributes to on-screen objects to
create an animated, real-time display of I/O information.
8: Working with TrendsExplains how to create and configure graphs to track data from I/O
points over time.
9: Configuring Trigger-Based EventsExplains how to use historical logging, application
launching, sounds, recipes, and how to change window states based on events.
10: Using PAC Display RuntimeDescribes how to customize configurable Runtime features and
what youll see during a Runtime project session.
A: PAC Display TroubleshootingGives tips for solving problems you may encounter while
building and using your PAC Display project.
B: PAC Display ErrorsExplains warnings and error messages you may see while running a
program in PAC Display Runtime.
C: PAC Display FilesLists all PAC Display files located in the PAC Display directory.
D: MenusLists commands and other menu bar options.
PAC Display IndexProvides an alphabetical list of key words and their page locations.
Document Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
Italic typeface indicates emphasis and is used for book titles. (Example: See the PAC Control
Users Guide for details.)
Names of menus, commands, dialog boxes, fields, and buttons are capitalized as they appear in
the product. (Example: From the File menu, select Print.)
File names appear either in all capital letters or in mixed case, depending on the file name itself.
(Example: Open the file TEST1.txt.)
Key press combinations are indicated by hyphens between two or more key names. For
example, SHIFT+F1 is the result of holding down the shift key, then pressing and releasing the
F1 key. Similarly, CTRL+ALT+DELETE is the result of pressing and holding the CTRL and ALT keys,
then pressing and releasing the DELETE key.
Click means press and release the left mouse button on the referenced item. Right-click
means press and release the right mouse button on the item.
Menu commands are referred to with the Menu > Command convention. For example,
File > Open Project means to select the Open Project command from the File menu.
Numbered lists indicate procedures to be followed sequentially. Bulleted lists (such as this one)
provide general information.
Online Help is available in PAC Display, PAC Control, and in most of the utility applications. To
open online Help, choose Help > Contents and Index in any screen.
Online versions (Adobe pdf format) of PAC Display documentation are provided on the PAC Display
CD and are also available from the Help menu in PAC Display. To view a document, select Help >
Manuals, and then choose a document from the submenu.
PAC Display and PAC Project resources are also available on the Opto 22 website at
www.opto22.com. You can conveniently access this and other sections of the Opto 22 website from
PAC Displays Help menu. Select Help > Opto 22 on the Web, and then select an online resource
from the submenu.
Product Support
If you have any questions about PAC Display, you can call, fax, or e-mail Opto 22 Product Support.
Phone:
800-TEK-OPTO (800-835-6786)
951-695-3080
(Hours are Monday through Friday,
7 a.m. to 5 p.m. Pacific Time)
Fax:
951-695-3017
Email:
Opto 22 website:
www.opto22.com
33
When calling for technical support, be prepared to provide the following information about your
system to the Product Support engineer:
System Requirements
Installation Requirements
Heres what you need to install and run PAC Display:
A computer with at least the minimum processor and memory required for your version of
Microsoft Windows, and Ethernet capability. Additional memory may be required for some
configurations.
VGA or higher resolution monitor (Super VGA recommended). Minimum size: 800x600 with
small fonts.
Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro (32-bit or 64-bit), Windows 7 Professional (32-bit or 64-bit),
Windows Vista Business (32-bit), or Windows XP Professional (32-bit, with Service Pack 2 or
higher), Windows Server 2008 R2 (OptoOPCServer and OptoDataLink only).
NOTE: Only Windows Server 2008 is supported by OptoOPCServer and OptoDataLink. Other versions
of Microsoft Windows server and embedded Windows operating systems are not supported.
If your PAC Display project uses many basic trends, SuperTrends, or XY Plots, we
strongly recommend adding RAM beyond the amount suggested here. See Memory
Requirements for SuperTrend Pens on page 194 for more information on memory
requirements.
If your PAC Display Pro project accesses an M4-series controller (such as a SNAP-LCM4 or
M4RTU) via an Ethernet connection, controller firmware version R4.1a or newer is required. In
addition, in order to access strings or string tables, controller firmware R4.1d or newer is
required.
NOTE: If your are using an operating system such as Windows XP that supports multiple monitors, you can
display the operator interface you create in PAC Display on more than one monitor as long as all monitors
have identical video cards.
55
Introduction
The quickest way to become familiar with PAC Display is by working through a simple example. Our
example will use a cookie factory to show you how easy it is to use PAC Display. Youll learn how to
start PAC Display, open and save a project, and assign a PAC Control strategy to the project. Then
youll bring in a bitmap, add some animation attributes, and watch your project in action. Well
repeat this process to fine-tune the visuals and well end up with a final working cookie factory.
NOTE: If you cant access an Opto 22 control engine at the moment, you can still do everything in the Quick
Start up to the point of running your project. Or, you can simulate the control engine of an Opto 22
programmable automation controller (PAC) using the Opto 22 SNAP PAC Sim software utility. For more
information, visit the Opto 22 website, www.opto22.com.
In This Chapter
Opening the Project..................................................... 7
Examining the Project ................................................. 9
Configuring a Control Engine ................................10
Adding a Dynamic Attribute ..................................17
Adding a Graphic............................................................19
Downloading to the Control Engine......................26
Running the Project.......................................................28
Whats Next? .....................................................................30
77
2. Select File > Open Project (or CTRL+O), and then navigate to C:\Users\Public\Public
Documents\Opto 22\PAC Project 9.1\Display Basic Examples\Display\ioCookies.
NOTE: For Windows XP, go to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Opto 22\PAC Project
9.1\Display Basic Examples.
The main window should look like the example shown below.
An oven
At the start of the process, a measured amount of dough is dropped onto the conveyor belt. The
dough moves first under the chip tank to receive some chips, and then into the oven to be baked.
The next stop is an inspection station, where rejected cookies are blown off the belt. The good
cookies go to shipping. Should anything go wrong, we also have some alarms built in to stop the
process if necessary.
99
This window is called a draw window, because in PAC Display Configurator this is where you can
create and position graphic objects and other elements for your operator interface. This is also
where you assign animation characteristics, or dynamic attributes, to graphic objects. Floating on top
of the window is a toolbox with all the tools you need to draw graphic objects.
2. Do the following:
If the control engine Cookie Controller is listed in this dialog box, continue with step 3
below.
10
If the control engine Cookie Controller is not listed in this dialog box, follow the steps in
Adding a Control Engine on page 12.
3. Select Cookie Controller in the Control Engines dialog box and click Replace.
4. In the Control Engine Properties dialog box that appears, click Browse in the Strategy section.
NOTE: This dialog box is slightly different in PAC Display Professional, but the Strategy section and
corresponding Browse button are the same.
The Strategy File Name Selection dialog box appears. This dialog box is much like the Open
Project dialog box we used to find our cookie factory project.
11
11
The PAC Display project is now configured to use your control engine for this Quick Start exercise.
Skip the next section, Adding a Control Engine, and continue with the steps in Adding a Dynamic
Attribute on page 17.
12
13
13
5. To define your control engine in the Primary Control Engine field, click the Browse button in the
Primary Control Engine group.
The Select Control Engine dialog box opens.
14
15
15
10. Click the new Cookie Controller control engine to select it, and then click OK.
The Control Engine Properties dialog box appears with the new control engine listed in the
Primary Control Engine group.
16
Notice that the dialog box has two separate groups of attributes: Controller Driven Attributes
and Operator Driven Attributes. Control Engine-driven attributes are attributes that are driven by
tag values from the PAC Control strategy assigned to the project. Operator-driven attributes are
driven by an operators interaction with a graphic object in PAC Display.
Were going to choose the operator-driven attribute Send Discrete to send a discrete value to
the control engine. The PAC Control strategy interprets the value as a signal to start the cookie
factory.
3. In the Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box under Operator Driven Attribute, select Send
Discrete, and then click Edit.
The Dynamic Attribute - Send Discrete dialog box opens.
17
17
5. Select Integer in the Item Type group and bStartFlag in the Item Name group.
6. Enter 1 in the Bit field, and then click OK.
The Dynamic Attribute - Send Discrete dialog box appears with the new tag name listed in the
Tag group.
18
7. Click OK.
The Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box appears with a check mark next to Send Discrete in
the Operator Driven Attributes list.
8. Click OK to complete adding the dynamic attribute and close the dialog box.
Adding a Graphic
Now lets add a portion of cookie dough underneath the first tank. Rather than drawing our cookie,
were going to use a drawing of a cookie saved as a bitmap graphics file (or bmp). This file is located
in the Display directory.
19
19
ADDING A GRAPHIC
3. Now choose the Bitmap tool in the PAC Display Configurator toolbox as shown below.
4. Click the cursor right above the conveyor belt and underneath the first vessel.
If the graphic is a little out of place, it can easily be moved to the correct position using the
Select tool.
5. Choose the Select tool in the toolbox, and then click the bitmap graphic to select it.
Nine square sizing handles appear around the graphic.
6. Put your cursor within the sizing handles, click your mouse, and drag the cookie to the correct
position above the conveyor belt and underneath the first vessel.
Besides visually placing the graphic, you can also use the arrow keys on the keyboard or use the
X: and Y: coordinates displayed in the toolbox to help you place the cookie. We suggest
coordinate locations X:151 and Y:257, but your coordinates may differ.
20
Now lets give the bitmap graphic some attributes to animate it. To make the cookie look like its
moving across the conveyor belt, well configure an attribute to affect its horizontal position.
7. Double-click the cookie bitmap graphic.
The Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box opens.
21
21
ADDING A GRAPHIC
22
Now we need to configure an attribute that will make the cookie dough appear to drop out of the
first vessel.
15. Double-click Visibility/Blink in the Control Engine Driven Attribute list.
The Dynamic Attribute - Visibility/Blink dialog box opens.
23
23
ADDING A GRAPHIC
18. Select Down Timer as the Item Type and dtCookieMotionTimer as the Item Name.
19. In the Refresh Time drop-down list, select Group 1 (250 ms).
24
25
25
1. Click the Windows Start button and select Programs > Opto 22 > PAC Project > Tools > PAC
Terminal.
The PAC Terminal window appears, displaying the name of our control engine.
2. Select Cookie Controller, and then choose File > Download Control Engine Forth File to
download the run file for our PAC Control strategy.
The Download File dialog box opens.
26
After the strategy has downloaded to the control engine, well start the strategy running on the
control engine. For convenience, well start the strategy using PAC Terminals Inspecting dialog box.
A more common method is to start the strategy while running PAC Control.
6. When the download is finished, double-click the control Engine, Cookie Controller.
The Inspecting dialog box opens showing data relating to the control engine.
27
27
In addition providing information about the control engine, this dialog box allows you to start
or stop the active strategy.
28
3. In the Open Project dialog box that opens, navigate to the C:\Users\Public\Public
Documents\Opto 22\PAC Project 9.1\Display Basic Examples\Display\ioCookies directory, and
then double-click the cfactory.uui project.
NOTE: For Windows XP, go to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Opto 22\PAC Project
9.1\Display Basic Examples.
The Event Log Viewer window should appear, displaying messages about the PAC Display
Runtime session. You might see a message showing that the control engine is connecting to
PAC Displays scanner.
29
29
WHATS NEXT?
At the bottom of the window, youll see the Auto Restore on New Message option selected.
This means anytime PAC Display Runtime issues a message (that is, an error or status message),
the Event Log Viewer will become the active, or topmost, window on the Windows desktop.
Youll also see the Enable Awaiting Connection Messages option, which lets you choose
whether to display some startup messages.
4. Click the Close button to close the Event Log Viewer window.
5. Start the cookie factory by clicking the on-screen Start button.
Watch the cookie dough drop out of the first tank and move down the conveyor. Notice that
the cookie appears to move outside of the oven and inspection stations.
6. Close PAC Display Runtime by clicking the Close Window button
2. With the Select tool, click the portion of dough on the conveyor belt.
3. Right-click the mouse, and from the pop-up menu that appears choose Z-Order > Send to
Back.
The graphic will now appear to travel through the oven and inspection stations, not in front of
them.
4. To save the project and start PAC Display Runtime to see the display working properly, select
File > Save Project and Load Runtime.
There are a few more things you can explore on your own. Notice that when you pass your cursor
over the setpoint boxes (SP), a black outline appears. Click on one of the boxes and an attribute
dialog box appears. You can go back to the Configurator and see how this attribute was set up. You
might also want to look at the tank flap attributes.
Whats Next?
After stepping through this chapter, you should have a handle on how simple it is to use PAC
Display. By taking the time up front to step through our short demo, youre now ready to explore the
many possibilities available.
Proceed to Chapter 3: What Is PAC Display?, to learn more about planning and designing an
operator interface. Youll also find out more about the windows and menus that make up PAC
Display Configurator and PAC Display Runtime.
At some point you may also want to take a look at the sample projects in the Examples folder
under C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Opto 22\PAC Project 9.1. Youll get ideas for how to use
different PAC Display onscreen objects and learn about various graphics you can use within your
own PAC Display projects.
30
Introduction
This chapter provides a general overview of using PAC Display, including information on what its
used for, project structure and design, and general terms youll encounter.
PAC Display is a software package used to create human-machine interfaces (HMIs), or operator
interfaces, for monitoring control systems. You can use PAC Display to create an HMI that will
monitor a PAC Control strategy running on an Opto 22 control engine, providing real-time and
historical information to the operator about the performance of different parts of a control system.
PAC Display works with PAC Control, a flowchart-based control language for writing control
applications. See the PAC Control Users Guide for more information on using PAC Control to create
strategies.
In This Chapter
Configurator and Runtime Applications ..........31
PAC Display Terminology ........................................32
Planning a Project ......................................................33
Configurator and Runtime Environments .......35
31
31
PAC Display Runtime Use PAC Display Runtime to run the project created in PAC Display
Configurator. PAC Display Runtime communicates with the control engine running the PAC Control
strategy, and animates the operator interface by changing the attributes (color, size, position, etc.) of
onscreen graphics based on how the values or states of linked items in the PAC Control strategy
change. If controls such as buttons and sliders are part of the PAC Display project, the operator can
use on-screen controls to change values that appear. This is how PAC Display is used to control
processes as well as monitor them.
PAC Display Runtime communicates with the control engine running the PAC Control strategy, and
animates the operator interface by changing the attributes (color, size, position, etc.) of onscreen
graphics based on how the values or states of linked items in the PAC Control strategy change.
PAC Display also includes a separate monitor-only version of the PAC Display Runtime application.
This version of PAC Display Runtime is functionally identical to the regular Runtime application,
except that it cannot be used to send values to a control engine. This can be useful for industrial
projects where no operator intervention is required.
The Event Log Viewer, which is part of PAC Display Runtime, starts automatically when PAC Display
Runtime is started. The Event Log Viewer displays a window that posts messages about PAC Display
communication activity. Typically, it pops up above all other windows when a message is posted,
but this feature can be disabled.
Draw window files are created automatically for each draw window used to display graphics in a
project. These files have sequentially numbered file extensions starting with an uppercase .W
(for example, .W01, .W02, and so on).
Draw window files are created automatically for each draw window used to display graphics in a
project. These files have sequentially numbered file extensions starting with an uppercase .W
(for example, .W0001, .W0002, and so on). There is a limit of 5,000 draw windows per project.
These project files, together with PAC Display Runtime, present an animated graphics interface for a
control system. See Appendix C: PAC Display Files, for a complete list of the files that make up a PAC
Display project.
Windows PAC Display projects have one or more draw windows inside the PAC Display main
window. A draw window is essentially a blank page on which you place, draw, or edit graphics and
other elements that will make up your operator interface. A draw window has static attributes of
position, size, and color. It also has visual states of open, closed, or iconified. Your project design
determines the number of draw windows and their contents.
A main window is the area of the display where you can view your application. Following the
conventions used in most Microsoft Windows applications, a main window contains a menu bar that
allows you to select various command options, and a title bar that displays the full project path.
32
Objects Objects include draw windows, graphics, alarm triggers, and trends (or graphs). There are
two types of objects: static and dynamic. Static objects do not change while PAC Display Runtime is
running. Dynamic objects change appearance, or cause the appearance of other PAC Display
objects to change while the project is running.
Tags A tag refers to data items, such as variables, I/O points, or PID loops, from a PAC Control
strategy. To access tags in a project, select the PAC Control strategies for the project. All tags in the
selected strategies are then available to PAC Display. Tags are used to animate your operator
interface through connections to graphic objects and their dynamic attributes. As the values of tags
change through control engine- or operator-driven attributes, the appearance of the graphics
change. Tags are also used as triggers to initiate system events such as sounds, historic logging, and
window configurations.
Connections A connection is made in PAC Display when a PAC Control tag is selected as either
the source that will change a graphic, or as the tag destination for any data changes entered by the
operator.
Planning a Project
A PAC Display project is made up of a collection of windows and other elements you create and
configure in PAC Display Configurator. You add graphics to the windows to create an operator
interface, and then connect to I/O data and variables in the tag name database of the associated
PAC Control strategy (the control program running on a Opto 22 control engine).
Once the windows, associated PAC Control strategy and Opto 22 control engine, and other
attributes of the PAC Display project have been set up using PAC Display Configurator, you can run
the project in PAC Display Runtime. When PAC Display Runtime is started, the project communicates
with one or more control engines. As the strategy runs on the control engine, values and states of
tag names in the PAC Control strategy database are continuously updated. This changing data in
turn modifies the attributes (such as size and position) of the graphics that are connected to the tag
names. The end result is an animated, continually updated display that shows the status of a control
process.
Project Design
The usefulness of your PAC Display project ultimately depends on how effective the display, or
operator interface, is. To create an effective operator interface, you may want to consider these tips
when youre designing your project:
Know your control process, including both the theoretical operation of the process and the
hands-on tasks required of the operator.
Identify the information the end user of your project, the operator, needs to know at different
points in time. Use this information to determine what will appear on the display.
33
33
PLANNING A PROJECT
Individual windows can display a closer look at the operations associated with different
stations. The individual windows can contain detailed information and provide controls
that would be difficult to present in a single window.
Allow or deny operator access to the HMI, as well as the use of individual on-screen controls,
based on users and groups defined in a Microsoft Windows network. (See Security Settings for
Graphics and Dynamic Attributes on page 148.)
Log all HMI use and operator actions to an encrypted archive, and allow selected users to log in
to PAC Display Runtime. (See Runtime Setup: Security Tab on page 301.)
Assign a password to the PAC Display project to prevent unauthorized users from opening it in
the PAC Display Configurator authoring application. (See Protecting a Project with a Password
on page 48.)
Window Design
When you create a new project, a project window and one or more draw windows will be available
in the PAC Display main window. After deciding which windows you will use for your project,
consider the design of individual windows and how they interact with other windows. This is where
the organization of your windows comes into play. For example, you could have the operator use
the Runtime menu commands to view different windows, or you could design buttons to let an
operator jump directly to related windows.
Keep in mind that the visual state of a window can affect the performance of PAC Display and the
control engine. As more windows are opened or iconified, PAC Display will gradually start to update
graphics more slowly. Window states, listed below, also affect how the PAC Display Runtime
software application scans the control engine and updates graphics.
An open window causes Runtime to update graphics with data from the built-in scanner.
An iconified window causes Runtime to continue requesting data from the scanner, but
graphics in the iconified window are not updated.
SuperTrends within a window can be configured to have Runtime request data from the
scanner or not.
Other choices you will have to make are whether a window should be pop-up or full-screen, and
whether a windows visual state is affected by another window. These and other aspects of
configuring windows are covered in 6: Working with Graphics on page 93 and 10: Using PAC
Display Runtime on page 293.
34
35
35
The Configurator main window consists of a title bar and a menu bar, along with other standard
Windows elements, and contains the toolbox and one or more draw windows.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Toolbox
Draw
Window
36
Configurator Toolbox
The toolbox contains a set of graphical icons that represent tools you can use in the Configurator.
Click any tool to select it, and then use it in the draw window. Also, below the graphical icons, the
toolbox displays coordinates and object dimensions to aid you in your drawing tasks.
For descriptions of the tools and how to use shortcut keys, see Using the Graphic Tools and
Shortcut Keys on page 102. For more details about any tools available in the toolbox, see 6:
Working with Graphics on page 93.
Toolbox Coordinates
Object Dimensions
If you want to use the space the toolbox occupies, you can hide the toolbox by selecting View >
Hide Toolbox. To open the toolbox again, select View > Show Toolbox.
37
37
Title Bar
Draw Window
Workspace
38
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Runtime
Main
Window
Open
Project
Windows
Event
Log
Viewer
The Runtime main window consists of a title bar, a menu bar, other standard Windows elements,
project windows, and the Event Log Viewer. Much like a frame, Runtimes main window contains all
the elements and actions that occur during Runtime use.
If you need additional space to position project windows and other windows in Runtime, you can
hide the menu bar to use the space it occupies. If you do this, note that you wont be able to access
commands on the menu bar.
39
39
Title Bar
Draw
Window
Workspace
Project windows are the Configurator draw windows that you created for the project. Notice that
when you launch your project in Runtime, these windows are the same size and in the same relative
position as when you closed the Configurator project. (Depending on certain configuration options,
the relative positions of the windows may differ slightly from those in the Configurator project.)
Project windows are composed of a title bar and a workspace. The title bar displays the name of the
window, and the workspace contains all of the graphics work you did in the Configurator.
40
You can also double-click any message to view its entire contents, if they are not already completely
visible. The Event Log Viewer can be manipulated like any other standard window.
The Auto Restore on New Message option sets whether the Event Log Viewer dialog box
automatically jumps to the foreground when a new event message is received. The Enable
Awaiting Connection Messages option is used to hide or display common startup messages.
41
41
42
Introduction
This chapter explains how to work with projects. Youll find out how project files are organized, and
then learn how to create, open, and save a project. An optional, advanced procedure for
customizing how PAC Display Configurator starts is also presented.
In This Chapter
How Projects Are Organized.....................................................43
Creating a Project .......................................................................... 44
Protecting a Project with a Password ................................... 48
Opening a Project.......................................................................... 49
Saving a Project ..............................................................................50
Saving Versions of a Project ...................................................... 50
Archiving a Project ........................................................................ 51
Exporting a Project........................................................................ 51
Closing a Project ............................................................................ 52
Customizing Project Properties............................................... 52
Creating a Batch File To Open and Run a Project............ 53
Configuring Screen Snapshots ................................................ 54
Combining PAC Display Projects............................................. 57
Configuring an ODBC Data Source........................................ 58
43
43
CREATING A PROJECT
Creating a Project
To create a new project in PAC Display Configurator, follow these steps:
1. Select File > New Project (or CTRL+N).
The New Project dialog box appears.
Dialog boxes in PAC Display follow common Microsoft Windows conventions, so youll
recognize familiar items such as the file list, the Up One Level button, and the File name field.
NOTE: If you need more information on how to use dialog boxes or other common parts of Microsoft
Windows, refer to the documentation from Microsoft and your computer manufacturer.
44
5. In the Control Engines dialog box, click Add to locate a PAC Control strategy running on the
control engine you want to connect to.
6. In the Strategy File Name Selection dialog box that opens, navigate to the PAC Control strategy
that is running on the control engine you plan to select.
(Pro only) To locate a legacy OptoControl strategy, click the drop-down menu in the Files of
Type dialog box and select OptoControl Strategy *.cdb.
NOTE: The next few steps are for PAC Display Basic. To configure the control engine using PAC Display
Professional, see Final Controller Configuration with PAC Display Professional on page 65.
45
45
CREATING A PROJECT
The strategy you selected appears in the Strategy field of the Control Engine Properties dialog
box.
Now you need to select the primary control engine from which PAC Display will receive I/O
point information. Remember that this control engine must be running the strategy you selected.
All control engines that have been configured to connect to your PC are listed, whether or not
they are associated with your strategy. If you previously configured a control engine for use
with PAC Control, for example, it would appear here, even if it didnt appear earlier when you
opened the Control Engines dialog box.
NOTE: If the control engine you want to use doesnt appear in the Select Control Engine dialog box,
you must connect and configure this control engine to make it available. Instructions for adding,
modifying, and deleting control engines appear in Chapter 4, Working with Control Engines, in the
PAC Control Users Guide.
9. To choose a control engine that connects with PAC Display, select its name and click OK.
The primary control engine you have added appears in the Control Engine Properties dialog
box.
46
10. To designate a backup control engine, click Browse in the Backup Control Engine group, choose
a control engine from the list and click OK.
The backup control engine you have added appears in the dialog box.
A backup control engine is used automatically in case the primary control engine fails or
becomes unavailable. Control remains on the backup controller until the backup controller
goes offline; control is not automatically returned to the primary control engine when it
becomes available again.
11. To change the path of the strategy to be relative to the current PAC Display project, select Make
Path Relative to Project.
This allows the project to be more easily transferred to other PCs that don't have the exact
same file structure.
12. When all the parameters in the Control Engine Properties dialog box are correct, click OK to
save your settings and close the dialog box.
The control engine appears in the Control Engines dialog box.
NOTE: To complete setting up the control engine, you need to select primary and secondary scanners.
For more information, see Configuring the Scanner on page 68
47
47
The untitled draw window is where you will begin drawing your operator interface. The
toolbox contains several icons representing graphic drawing tools. For more information, see
Chapter 6: Working with Graphics.
48
Opening a Project
To open an existing project in PAC Display Configurator or PAC Display Runtime, follow these steps:
1. Select File > Open Project.
(Configurator only) If you already have an open project, you will be asked if you want to save it.
Click Yes or No, or click Cancel to close the Save Project dialog box.
The Open Project dialog box appears.
49
49
SAVING A PROJECT
Saving a Project
There are three options for saving a project in PAC Display Configurator: Save Project, Save Project As,
and Save Project and Load Runtime.
Save Project
To save your project to the same file name you opened or created, Select File > Save Project (or
CTRL+S). If there have been no changes to the project since you last saved it, no messages appear
when this save occurs.
Save Project As
1. To save the project with a new name, select File > Save Project As (or SHIFT+CTRL+S).
2. In the Save As dialog box, type a project name in the File name field.
When youre done saving the project file with a new name, this name is automatically
appended with the suffix .uui, indicating a PAC Display project file.
3. If you want to save your project in a new directory, follow the sub-steps below, and then
continue with the next step.
a. Click the Create New Folder button.
The new folder you created appears in the list of files and folders. The name of the new
folder should be highlighted, meaning you can enter a new name for the folder.
b. Type a new name for the folder, preferably one that includes the project name.
c. Double-click the new folder to open it.
4. Click Save to save the project with a new file name.
50
To automatically create a numbered version of modified PAC Display project files each time you save
the project, select File > Configurator Options. Then, in the Configurator Options dialog, select Auto
Increment Version on Save. Project (.UUI) and window (.WXX) files will be copied, renamed with a
version number, and placed in the same directory as the current project. Other project files such as
background bitmap images and similar graphics are not copied.
Archiving a Project
To archive the current project:
1. Select either File > Archive Project or File > Archive Project and Email to Opto 22.
The project is archived to the current project directory with all the files necessary to transfer the
project to another computer.
If you choose Archive Project and Email to Opto 22, the project is attached automatically to an
email addressed to Opto 22 Product Support. In order for Product Support to better assist you,
a message will advise you to use PAC Control to archive the strategy files to submit along with
the PAC Display archive.
When the archiving is finished the following dialog box appears.
Exporting a Project
If you want to compare one project to anotherperhaps to see what has changedyou can
export each project to a text file and then use a file comparison utility (such as WinMerge) to
compare the files.
51
51
CLOSING A PROJECT
Each exported text file is formatted for easy reading and includes all the information about the
project, including windows, graphics, dynamic atributes, alarm points, historic logs, recipes, and so
on.
1. Select File > Export Project.
2. In the Export Project As dialog box, navigate to the destination folder and enter a name for the
file.
3. Click Save.
4. Repeat the steps for the next project, then open the text files in your file comparison utility.
Closing a Project
To close the current project you have open, select File > Close Project. If youve modified the project
since it was last saved, you will be asked if you want to save those changes before closing the
project.
Only one project can be open at any one time in PAC Display. Creating or opening a project
automatically closes any currently open project first. When this happens, you will be asked if you
want to save changes if they havent been already saved.
52
Start up
In the Start up folder youll see several properties defined, as shown below.
Delete these
properties to reset
PAC Displays startup
configuration.
53
53
1. Open an empty text file using Windows Notepad or another text editor.
2. Enter specific commands to perform the following tasks:
Change drives to the drive containing the project.
Change directories to the directory containing the project.
Start PAC Display Runtime.
Delay launching Runtime.
3. Now save the file using the .bat file extension.
Once you have created the batch file, you can make a Windows shortcut of this file and place it on
the Windows desktop for easy access. Alternately, you could place the shortcut in the Windows Start
Up folder so the project starts to run when the computer starts up.
The second line changes directories to the directory C:\Program Files\Opto22\PAC Project 9.1\
The third line starts PAC Display Runtime using the path "c:\Opto 22\Projects\myproject.UUI" to
load the project myproject.UUI.
The last line delays launching Runtime to allow Windows services time to get started. Runtime
depends on the OptoDispLS service to be running.
54
To configure snapshots:
1. Select Configure > Snapshots.
2. In the Snapshots Configuration dialog box, click New.
55
55
7.
8.
9. Repeat the previous steps for each snapshot configuration you want to create.
10. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Modifying a Snapshot
To modify an existing snapshot, click on its name in the list, and make your changes. When finished,
click the Modify link to accept the changes, or click Cancel to cancel any changes
56
4. If you change the name of a strategy or control engine, youll need to point the PAC Display
project to the new strategy name or control engine name as follows:
a. Open PAC Display in Configure mode and select Configure > Control Engine(s).
b. Select the control engine, click the Replace button, and then click OK.
c. Select Tools > AutoCorrect Tags.
d. When you download the updated PAC Control strategy, you will need to run the updated
PAC Display project. It is important to keep your PAC Display project in sync with the
strategies that are running on the control engines.
NOTE: For more information, see Configuring Control Engines on page 62.
57
57
Supported databases include MySQL, Microsoft Access, and Microsoft SQL Server. In order to use
this feature, the database must already have been created, and the ODBC connector must be
configured. See the instructions below to configure the ODBC connector in Windows, and then
configure the database in PAC Display.
Also see the following sections:
Saving a SuperTrend to a Database on page 208
Logging Historic Data to a Database on page 224
Configuring a Runtime Operator Action Log Database on page 316
In Windows, do the following:
1. Click the Windows Start button and the Run... option and enter (or copy and paste) one of the
following to open the Windows ODBC Data Source Administrator.
For a 32-bit version of Windows, use:
%systemdrive%\Windows\SysWOW64\odbcad32.exe
For a 64-bit version of Windows, use:
%systemdrive%\Windows\System32\odbcad32.exe
58
2. Click Add to open the Create New Data Source dialog box.
3. Highlight the appropriate driver for your data source, then click Finish. The drivers connector
opens.
For example, heres the ODBC connector for MySQL.
59
59
4. See the user documentation for your ODBC connector to complete the process.
In PAC Display, do the following:
1. In Configurator, select Configure > ODBC Data Source to open the Select ODBC Data Source
dialog box.
2. Under ODBC Data Source, select the ODBC connector that is configured for the target database.
3. Enter any required username and password.
4. To test the connection to the ODBC Data Source, click the Test button.
If the ODBC connector is set up properly, a popup message will say, Successfully connected to
Database!
5. Click OK.
Now youre ready to log data to an ODBC database. For more information, see the following sections:
Saving a SuperTrend to a Database on page 208
Logging Historic Data to a Database on page 224
Configuring a Runtime Operator Action Log Database on page 316
60
In This Chapter
Configuring Control Engines................................................ 62
Configuring the Scanner........................................................ 68
Configuring Tags........................................................................ 75
Correcting Tags from a Strategy.......................................... 84
Configuring a Project with No Control Engine............. 87
61
61
If you have not previously configured a control engine for the PAC Display project you opened,
the Name list is empty and only the Add button is available.
3. To locate a PAC Control strategy running on the control engine you want to connect to, click
Add.
4. In the Strategy File Name Selection dialog box that opens, navigate to the PAC Control strategy
that is running on the control engine you plan to select.
62
To locate an OptoControl strategy, click the drop-down menu in the Files of Type dialog box
and select OptoControl Strategy *.cdb.
5. If you have PAC Display Basic, see Final Controller Configuration with PAC Display Basic on
page 63 to complete controller configuration. If you have PAC Display Professional, see Final
Controller Configuration with PAC Display Professional on page 65.
Now you need to select the primary control engine from which PAC Display will receive I/O
point information. Remember that this control engine must be running the strategy you selected.
63
63
All control engines that have been configured to connect to your PC are listed, whether or not
they are associated with your strategy. If you previously configured a control engine for use
with PAC Control, for example, it would appear here, even if it didnt appear earlier when you
opened the Control Engines dialog box.
NOTE: If the control engine you want to use doesnt appear in the Select Control Engine dialog box,
you must connect and configure this control engine to make it available. Instructions for adding,
modifying, and deleting control engines appear in Chapter 4, Working with Control Engines, in the
PAC Control Users Guide.
3. To choose a control engine that connects with PAC Display, select its name and click OK.
The primary control engine you have added appears in the Control Engine Properties dialog
box.
4. To designate a backup control engine, click Browse in the Backup Control Engine group, choose
a control engine from the list and click OK.
The backup control engine you have added appears in the dialog box.
A backup control engine is used automatically in case the primary control engine fails or
becomes unavailable. Control remains on the backup controller until the backup controller
64
goes offline; control is not automatically returned to the primary control engine when it
becomes available again.
5. To change the path of the strategy to be relative to the current PAC Display project, select Make
Path Relative to Project.
This allows the project to be more easily transferred to other PCs that don't have the exact
same file structure.
6. When all the parameters in the Control Engine Properties dialog box are correct, click OK to
save your settings and close the dialog box.
NOTE: When you configure the control engine in PAC Display, you should also designate a local or remote
scanner. In PAC Display, a scanner is a software component that manages all communications with one
or more control engines. By default, the scanner runs on the same PC running the PAC Display project, but
your application may benefit from configuring a remote scanner. See Configuring the Scanner on
page 68 for more information.
Now you need to select the primary control engine from which PAC Display will receive I/O
point information. Remember that this control engine must be running the strategy you selected.
65
65
All control engines that have been configured to connect to your PC are listed, whether or not
they are associated with your strategy. If you previously configured a control engine for use
with PAC Control, for example, it would appear here, even if it didnt appear earlier when you
opened the Control Engines dialog box.
NOTE: If the control engine you want to use doesnt appear in the Select Control Engine dialog box,
you must connect and configure this control engine to make it available. Instructions for adding,
modifying, and deleting control engines appear in Chapter 4, Working with Control Engines, in the
PAC Control Users Guide. To add, modify, and delete FactoryFloor controllers, see the same chapter in
the OptoControl Users Guide (Opto 22 form 724).
3. To choose a control engine that connects with PAC Display, select its name and click OK.
The primary control engine you have added appears in the Control Engine Properties dialog
box.
4. To select a primary scanner, click the Choose... button.
5. If you want to use the local computer as the primary scanner, select This Computer and then
click OK to exit the dialog box and finish the configuration. However, to designate a different
computer as the primary scanner, click the Remote OptoOPCServer button.
66
6. In the list of computers that appears, navigate to the PC that has OptoOPCServer software
installed and configured. Select the computer and click OK.
IMPORTANT: To successfully use OptoOPCServer on a remote computer with PAC Display, Windows
user and application permission settings on both local and remote computers must be correctly
configured. See the OptoOPCServer Users Guide (Opto 22 form 1439) for detailed instructions for
configuring OptoOPCServer and OPC clients for network operation.
67
67
interfacethe primary and secondary addresses. Then, using PAC Control, you assign the two
addresses to the control engine.
Once this has been set up, you can use the primary and secondary IP addresses in a PAC Display
project to access data from the PAC Control strategy running on the control engine.
In a system with link redundancy, one address is always active. If the primary address is unavailable,
then the secondary address becomes the active address and PAC Display will automatically shift to
the secondary address. If the secondary address fails, then the primary address becomes the active
address and it will automatically try the primary address again. If communication to the active
address fails and the control engine is not able to switch to the other address, then communication
to the I/O unit becomes disabled. Communication is tested on each valid address that is enabled
(any address other than 0.0.0.0) when a strategy is started or when communication to an I/O unit is
changed from disabled to enabled.
On a SoftPAC controller, the PC running SoftPAC must have two network interface cards (NICs)
configured with static primary and secondary IP addresses on different subnets.
To set up Ethernet link redundancy:
1. Using PAC Manager, assign the primary and secondary IP addresses to the control engine.
See Chapter 2, Configuring Devices in the PAC Manager Users Guide, form 1704. To obtain this
form, go to the Opto 22 website, www.opto22.com, and search on the form number, 1704.
2. Using PAC Control, configure link redundancy for the control engine.
See Using Ethernet Link Redundancy in PAC Control in Chapter 5 of the PAC Control Users Guide,
form 1700.
Once you have set up link redundancy for the control engine you are using in your PAC Control
strategy, it works automatically in PAC Display.
To view which control engine is currently running, click View > Configuration in Runtime.
68
several monitor-only versions of PAC Display projects on office computers in addition to using
regular monitor-and-control versions of PAC Display at operator workstations.
If you need to run multiple instances of PAC Display on separate computers, use Opto 22s
OptoOPCServer software as a centralized scanner. Running on a PC or network server,
OptoOPCServer centralizes communications with Opto 22 control engines. This greatly increases
the efficiency with which computers running PAC Display can exchange information with control
engines. OptoOPCServer software is sold separately from PAC Display, and is available from Opto 22
and local Opto 22 distributors.
Computers running
PAC Display projects
Computer running
OptoOPCServer
Opto 22 industrial
controllers
running PAC
Control strategies
OptoOPCServer provides a
remote scanner for PAC
Display. This centralizes the
exchange of I/O data
between computers
running PAC Display and
controllers.
NOTE: PAC Display software can communicate only with its built-in scanner or with OptoOPCServer
software. PAC Display is not a generic OPC client, and cannot be used with third-party OPC servers.
In addition to serving as a remote scanner for PAC Display, OptoOPCServer supports third-party
SCADA, HMI, data collection, and other OPC-client software. For these third-party OPC clients,
OptoOPCServer can supply I/O point data from SNAP PAC systems that is not supported by PAC
Display.
IMPORTANT: OptoOPCServer must be correctly installed and configured on a network server or
workstation before a PAC Display project can use it as a scanner. See the OptoOPCServer Users Guide
(Opto 22 form 1439) for detailed information on installing OptoOPCServer and configuring it for network
operation, including DCOM. (This form is provided with the purchase of OptoOPCServer.)
For Basic, see Configuring a Remote Scanner Location in PAC Display Basic below.
For Pro, see Configuring a Remote Scanner in PAC Display Pro on page 70.
69
69
2. In the Select Scanner Location dialog box that opens, click Remote OptoOPCServer.
3. In the list of computers that appears, navigate to the PC that has OptoOPCServer software
installed and configured. Select the computer and click OK.
IMPORTANT: To successfully use OptoOPCServer on a remote computer with PAC Display, Windows
user and application permission settings on both local and remote computers must be correctly
configured. See the OptoOPCServer Users Guide (Opto 22 form 1439) for detailed instructions for
configuring OptoOPCServer and OPC clients for network operation.
70
Double-click
the control
engine
3. In the Control Engine Properties dialog box, click the Choose... button.
5. In the list of computers that appears, navigate to the PC that has OptoOPCServer software
installed and configured. Select the computer and click OK.
71
71
IMPORTANT: To successfully use OptoOPCServer on a remote computer with PAC Display, Windows
user and application permission settings on both local and remote computers must be correctly
configured. See the OptoOPCServer Users Guide (Opto 22 form 1439) for detailed instructions for
configuring OptoOPCServer and OPC clients for network operation.
2. Make sure the correct computer is selected for Primary Scanner Location and then click Select
Secondary.
72
3. In the Select Secondary Scanner Location dialog box, click Remote OptoOPCServer and select a
computer from the list tree that you want to use for the remote secondary scanner. Click OK
when done.
IMPORTANT: To successfully use OptoOPCServer on a remote computer with PAC Display, Windows
user and application permission settings on both local and remote computers must be correctly
configured. See the OptoOPCServer Users Guide (Opto 22 form 1439) for detailed instructions for
configuring OptoOPCServer and OPC clients for network operation.
4. Click OK to save your changes and close the Select Secondary Scanner Location dialog box.
5. In the Configure Secondary Scanner dialog box, click OK to save your changes.
73
73
To set how often PAC Display checks the operation of the scanner:
1. In PAC Display Configurator Basic, select Configure > Scanner Location.
In Pro, select Configure > Scanner Defaults.
For Basic, the Select Scanner Location dialog box appears.
2. In Scanner Heartbeat Check Interval, enter the interval in seconds at which PAC Display will
check to see if the scanner is operating.
You can enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds (integer values only). The default value of
10 seconds is suitable for most applications. If there is a slow communications link between the
computer running the PAC Display project and the computer running the scanner, use a longer
heartbeat interval to reduce network traffic.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your settings.
74
2. Select or deselect the Enable Awaiting Connection Messages checkbox to display or hide any
Bad Quality or Not Connected messages that may occur when the PAC Display project
starts.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your settings.
Configuring Tags
Graphics in PAC Display can be linked directly to the values of PAC Control tags, so you will configure
tags quite often as you develop PAC Display projects. Tags are configured using the Tag Selection
dialog box, which you can access from many dialog boxes in PAC Display Configurator by clicking
the Tag Selection button
.
The tags that appear in the Tag Selection dialog box are actively filtered; rather than display all
possible item types and item names, only the item types available for the selected control engine
appear in the Item Type list, and only the item names available for a selected item type appear in the
Item Name list. For detailed information on item types and names in PAC Control strategies, see the
PAC Control Users Guide.
To configure a tag, complete the fields as described in Tag Selection Dialog Box below.
75
75
CONFIGURING TAGS
B
A
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
(A) Controller. Select the control engine that contains the tag you wish to use. If only one control
engine is available, it is automatically selected. Choosing a control engine updates the Item Type list
(B) so that it displays only the PAC Control data types available in that control engines PAC Control
strategy.
(B) Item Type. Select the type of data you wish to use. The list contains the data types available in
the selected control engines PAC Control strategy. (The data types that appear depend on which
data type was selected in the Setup by field in the preceding dialog box.) When you select a
specific item type, a list of all the tags of that selection type appears in the Item Name list box (C).
Your Item Type selection also determines the options available in the Selected Fields group (D).
PAC Display can access tags for most types of variables and other information in a PAC Control or
OptoControl strategy. See the PAC Control Users Guide or OptoControl Users Guide for information on
a specific type of variable.
NOTE: In order to get the value referenced by a pointer, use the variables actual type, such Integer, Float,
and so on. You cannot use a variable from a Pointer Table.
PAC Display can also access memory-map-based Scratch Pad variables in SNAP Ultimate
controller/brains, the SNAP-LCE controller, and SNAP PAC controllers; see Selecting Tags for I/O Unit
Scratch Pad Variables on page 80 for information on configuring Scratch Pad variables in the Tag
Selection dialog box.
See also, Tag Types You Can Save to an Historic Log on page 220.
(C) Item Name. This is an alphabetical list of the available PAC Control tags of the type specified
in the Item Type list. Select the tag you want to use from this list.
76
(D) Selected Fields. The item type of the tag you select determines which of these fields, if any,
need to have contents specified. If an entry is not needed, then the option is not available.
IMPORTANT: There are differences in how some tags are configured in this dialog box.
If SNAP high-density digital modules are used in your I/O system, see Tag Selection Dialog (High Density
Digital Tag Type) on page 79 for more information.
If the Scratch Pad feature available in some SNAP brains is used to store bit, integer, floating point, or string
values, see Selecting Tags for I/O Unit Scratch Pad Variables on page 80 for more information.
(E) Field. Specifies the data that is associated with the selected tag. For example, if the selected tag
is of Item Type Digital Input Point, the available field is State. If the tag Item Type is Float, the Field list
box is disabled.
For the Send String tag type:
Strategy Date return the date stamp of the stategy file in the control engine.
Strategy Time returns the time stamp of the stategy file in the control engine.
Auto/Manual Flag This option is not recommended; it is available only for backward
compatibility. It is not available for not-Ethernet PID tags. If PAC Display is configured to scan
I/O tags from the I/O unit (the default), this option determines if the PID loop is in manual
mode (Manual = True (1) = Discrete ON; Auto = False (0) = Discrete OFF). However, if PAC
Display is configured to scan I/O tags through the controller, it will determine whether the PID
loop is in Auto (Auto = True (1); Manual = False (0)). For all new development, use the Is
Manual? option instead.
Is Manual? This is the recommended option and should be used for all new development. It is
not available for non-Ethernet PID tags. It determines if the PID loop is in manual mode. When
in manual mode, the value will be True (1); when in Auto mode, the value will be False (0). It is
consistent whether PAC Display is configured to scan the I/O tags through the controller or
directly from the I/O unit.
If the PID loop is in manual, it will return a discrete ON. If the PID loop is in Auto, it will return a
discrete OFF.
To put the loop in Auto, set the Is Manual? option to discrete OFF. To put the loop into manual,
set it to discrete ON .
NOTE: To set whether tags are retrieved directly from the I/O unit or through the controller, go to
Configure > Runtime and choose the IO Unit Tags tab. If an I/O unit is checked, the tags are retrieved
directly though the I/O unit. If unchecked, the tags are retrieved through the controller. For more
information, see Runtime Setup: I/O Unit Tag Tab on page 320
77
77
CONFIGURING TAGS
(F) Element. If the selected Item Type is one of the Table types and only a single element of the
table is desired, enter the index of that element in this field.
(G) Bit. If the base type is Integer, a specific bit in the range specified may be selected from the
integer.
For configuring a Discrete control engine-driven dynamic attribute, if you are configuring an integer
tag type and do not specify a bit index and the integer value is 0, the tag will evaluate to FALSE. Any
non-zero value will be considered TRUE. However, if you do specify a bit and the bit is OFF, the tag
will evaluate to FALSE; if the bit is ON, the tag will evaluate to TRUE.
For configuring the Send Discrete operator-driven dynamic attribute, if you specify a bit, the
following message will appear: No bit index is specified. All bits will be set. OK to continue?
However, if you select a bit index, then only that bit will be modified.
For more information, see Available Dynamic Attributes on page 151.
(H) Start Index. To select multiple elements from Item Type Table, use the Start Index to specify
the first element and Num Elements to specify how many.
(I) Refresh Time. If a control engine-driven attribute is being edited, select the refresh time
group to be used for scanning. All tags that are defined as part of the same refresh time group are
scanned at the same time. A time group with a refresh time of 0 seconds is scanned as quickly as the
speed of the communications link permits.
(J) OK. Click OK to save your settings. (Click Cancel to close the dialog box without making any
changes.)
Select Digital Input Points as the Item Type. Under Item Name, select HDDI_A.
Select High Density Digital as the Item Type. Then under Selected Fields, enter 0 in the Module
field and 15 in the Point field.
High-Density digital modules provide 32 digital input or output points in one SNAP module. See the
PAC Control Users Guide for information on using these modules in a PAC Control strategy. For
additional information, see Opto 22 form 1547, the SNAP High-Density Digital Module Users Guide.
78
C
D
E
(A) Item Type. Select the item type High Density Digital to see all I/O units configured in the
PAC Control strategy for your PAC Display project.
If the PAC Control strategy has at least one configured I/O unit, High Density Digital always appears
in the Item Type list, even if a SNAP high-density digital module is not used in your I/O system.
(B) Item Name. Select the name of the I/O unit where the SNAP high-density digital module you
want to use is installed.
(C) Field. Choose a field based on the type of dynamic attribute (controller-driven or
operator-driven), and whether you want to work with a single point on the high-density module or
all 32 points. One or more of the following fields will be available:
Must specify:
Field
Dynamic Attribute
Tag
Description
Module
Point
Discrete
Value
n/a
Discrete
Value
n/a
Controller-driven
State
Operator-driven
79
79
CONFIGURING TAGS
Must specify:
Field
Dynamic Attribute
Tag
Description
Module
Discrete
Controller-driven
Value
Counts
Point
n/a
n/a
n/a
Discrete
Operator-driven
Value
n/a
Discrete
Value
n/a
Discrete
Value
n/a
Discrete
Value
n/a
Controller-driven
Latch (ON)
Operator-driven
Controller-driven
Latch (OFF)
Operator-driven
(D) Module. Enter the position (016) where the high-density digital module is installed on the
mounting rack.
(E) Point. Enter the number (031) of the modules digital input or output point.
80
specify an index number and the number of elements to be read. Scratch Pads for integer and
floating point values can have up to 10,240 elements, but unlike PAC Control table variables, the
elements in these Scratch Pads are non-contiguous. This means that when you specify a range that
exceeds 1024 elements (indices 01023), the range must be divided between two tags as shown
below.
Item Name in Tag Selection Dialog Box
Description
First
Element
Last
Element
IO_Unit_Name:SP_INT
1023
IO_Unit_Name:SP_INT_EXT
1024
10239
IO_Unit_Name:SP_FLOAT
1023
IO_Unit_Name:SP_FLOAT_EXT
1024
10239
Example: The I/O unit labeled Station_01 has floating point values stored in elements 0 to 2047.
To display all these values using, for instance, PAC Displays Table object you would need to do the
following:
1. Create one table control, which can display up to four separate Table objects.
2. In the Tag Selection dialog box for the first table object, select the Item Name
Station_01:SP_FLOAT.
3. For the Start Index value, enter 0, and for Number of Elements, enter 1024.
4. In the Tag Selection dialog box for the second table object, select the Item Name
Station_01:SP_FLOAT_EXT.
5. For the Start Index value, enter 1024, and for Number of Elements, enter 1024.
When the project is run in PAC Display Runtime, the first table will show floating point values in
indices 0 through 1023, while the second table will show values in indices 1024 through 2047.
81
81
CONFIGURING TAGS
A
B
C
D
82
All windows to search and replace in all windows in the PAC Display project.
Chosen graphics to search and replace tags in just the graphics youve selected.
Entire Project to search and replace tags in all parts of the PAC Display project.
(B) Search For. Select the type of tag to search and replace.
Refresh Group: A refresh time group determines how often the tag is scanned. To change all tags in
the search scope from one refresh group to another, in Find What (C), enter the number of the
refresh group to change from. In Replace With (D), enter the number of the refresh group to change
to. The numbers must be in the range 013. For more information, see Scanning to Update
Graphics on page 183.
Offset By: If you select Table Index or Bit Index, the Offset By option appears. To offset a bit or table
index either enter the value or use the up and down arrows.
This feature allows you to select one or several graphics and change the index easily. For example, if
you want to copy a set of graphics so that the second set of graphics looks at a different table or bit
index than the first set, rather than manually changing all the tags, you can just select all the
graphics in the new set and use Offset By to change all the table or bit indices at once.
NOTE: If you enter a value in either the Find what or the Replace with field, the Offset By controls are
disabled.
Exact Text: Search and replace text in tag names, button text, labels, trend pens, refresh group text,
combo box entries, and so on. Choose from the following options to further define the scope of the
search.
Text on Window Objects: Searches labels, button text, combo box text, and so on. It does not
search/replace the names of the windows themselves.
Everywhere: Searches for both Tags and Text on Window Objects. It does not search recipe files.
(C) Find What. Enter the name of the tag to find. If either Control Engine or Item Name is selected
in Search For (B), you can choose the item from a drop-down menu. For Item Name, you can also
enter the exact name of the item directly in the text field. For all other tag types, enter in the text
field the name of the tag exactly as it appears in the PAC Control strategy.
(D) Replace With. Enter the name of the tag to replace the tag found in Find What (C). The
replacement item must be the same kind of item as the item being searched for. If either Control
Engine or Item Name is selected in Search For (B), you can choose the item from a drop-down
menu. For Item Name, you can also enter the exact name of the item directly in the text field. For all
other tag types, enter in the text field the name of the tag exactly as it appears in the PAC Control
strategy.
83
83
(E) OK. Click OK to start the search, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without any changes.
If you use a PAC Display project that contains objects you imported or copied from an
OptoDisplay project. (OptoDisplay is the HMI authoring tool for Opto 22s FactoryFloor Software
Suite.)
If you import a window created in a different PAC Display project. (Window files can be
exported from a PAC Display project, saved as files, and imported into another project. See
Importing, Exporting, and Saving Windows on page 98 for information.)
There are some tag errors in a PAC Display project that AutoCorrect Tags cannot fix. These errors
include if you do either of the following:
You may also get unreliable results if you delete a tag from a strategy, and then create a new tag
with the same name.
84
2. Click Yes.
The Select Window dialog box appears.
85
85
(A). Name and location of the results file created by AutoCorrect Tags.
(B). Date and time the file was created.
(C). Warning message that reports that the table length of RecipeFloatTbl changed from an old
length of five elements to a new length of three elements. Location shows where the tag was used
in the PAC Display project. In this example, it was found in a window called master, attached to an
ellipse at x: and y: coordinates of 38 and 159, with the color dynamic attribute.
(D). Error message that the tag HistoricLogTrigger2 is no longer part of the PAC Control strategy,
and this could not be corrected by the AutoCorrect Tags tool. The tag was used as the start trigger
for an historic log called Mass Storage.
To fix this error, youll have to assign another tag in your PAC Display project to use as the start
trigger for this historic log. (Note that PAC Display wont recreate the connection to the tag if you
open your PAC Control strategy and add the old tag name again. Internally, PAC Display cant
correlate the old tag name and the new, similarly named tag.)
86
Display project is corrected to use the new tag name. The tag was used in a recipe called Peanut
Butter Cookies as its trigger.
(F). Warning message that multiple errors have been found for one tag name:
The table name RecipeIntegerTbl changed to RecipeIndex, and its length changed from five
elements to three elements. The PAC Display project is updated with this change.
An index into table out of bounds error was detected and couldnt be corrected. Specifically,
the project tried to use the fifth element of the table (RecipeIntegerTbl[4]), but the fifth
element no longer exists. To correct this problem you must specify a valid index. The tag was
used in a recipe called Peanut Butter Cookies. When the recipe is successfully downloaded,
PAC Display writes a value to this notification tag.
(G). The final tally of all the warnings and errors found by AutoCorrect Tags is reported here.
Note that if you run AutoCorrect Tags again, you will see only those errors that were reported as
cannot correct. The other reported errors have been corrected.
When you no longer need the Opton.$$$ file, you can delete the file from your hard drive.
87
87
If you have not previously configured a control engine for the PAC Display project you opened,
the Name list is empty and only the Add button is available.
NOTE: PAC Display gets its tag database from a PAC Control strategy that you provide with properly
configured I/O units and points. The strategy does not need to have any logic. For information on
creating a PAC Control strategy, see the PAC Control Users Guide.
4. Navigate to the PAC Control strategy, select the strategy file and click Open.
The strategy you selected appears in the Strategy field of the Control Engine Properties dialog
box.
NOTE: This dialog box is slightly different in PAC Display Professional, but the Strategy section and
corresponding Browse button are the same.
88
5. Click the Browse button in the Primary Control Engine group. You do not need to define a
Backup Control Engine.
The Select Control Engine dialog box opens.
89
89
9. Make sure that you have not changed the values in the Port, Retries, and Timeout, and then
click OK.
The non-existent control engine appears in the Select Control Engine dialog box.
10. Click the new control engine to select it, and then click OK.
The Control Engine Properties dialog box appears with the new control engine listed in the
Primary Control Engine group.
11. To change the path of the strategy to be relative to the current PAC Display project, select Make
Path Relative to Project.
This allows the project to be more easily transferred to other PCs that don't have the exact
same file structure.
12. Click OK.
The Control Engines dialog box appears with the new control engine.
90
91
91
92
Introduction
This chapter describes how to use PAC Display Configurator to create and edit graphic objects, and
how to import images. It also describes how to configure the windows in which these items appear.
In This Chapter
Using Draw Windows and URL Windows.........93
Drawing Graphic Objects...................................... 100
Selecting Graphic Objects .................................... 104
Grouping and Locking Graphics........................ 106
Importing Graphics.................................................. 108
Saving Objects as Bitmaps ................................... 111
Copying, Duplicating, and Pasting.................... 111
Moving and Resizing Graphics ........................... 112
Changing Stacking Order...................................... 115
93
93
2. Enter a new name for the window, and configure the existing settings if necessary.
See Modifying Draw or URL Windows below for instructions on configuring windows.
94
2. Select a single window, or select multiple windows by clicking Select All or by holding down
the CTRL key while selecting windows.
3. Click OK.
If you selected more than one window, a message warns that deleting the windows cannot be
undone.
4. Click Yes in the message box that appears to confirm the deletion.
Click on a window to select it, and then choose Window > Properties.
The Window Properties dialog box appears. (See Window Properties Dialog Box below.)
95
95
A
B
C
D
E
I
J
(A) Name. Enter the name of the window. This name appears in the windows title bar unless the
title bar is hidden by deselecting the Caption option in the Control group (D).
(B) X and Y Position. Enter the X and Y coordinates where the window appears in the project
window. The X and Y coordinates indicate the location, in pixels, of the draw windows upper-left
corner; the upper-left corner of the project window has X and Y coordinates of 0.
(C) Width and Height. Enter the width and height of the window. Width and height are
measured in pixels.
(D) Rescale on Resize. Check this box to rescale the window graphics when the window size is
changed in this dialog box. In order for window graphics to be correctly scaled, make sure to disable
Show window contents while dragging in Windows as described below. You can undo a rescaled
graphic using this method. However, undo is not exact due to rounding when the graphic is
rescaled. Combo Box graphics will only rescale their width, not height.
To disable Show window contents while dragging:
1. In the Windows Control Panel, click System.
2. On the left sidebar, click Advanced system settings.
3. In the Performance section, click Settings.
4. Uncheck Show window contents while dragging, and click OK.
(E) URL. (URL window only) Enter the URL that you want this window to link to.
(F) Control. Use the options in the Control group to configure the appearance of the window.
Select or deselect the following options:
BorderHides or displays the narrow edge of the window. This option must be selected for
the other options in the Control group to be available.
96
CaptionHides or displays the bar at the top of the window where the window name
appears. This option must be selected to move the window within the larger project window.
Size handlesIf selected, lets you resize the window by clicking and dragging an edge or
corner of the window.
System menuHides or displays the small system menu icon and the Close Window button
located at the top of the window. This option is unavailable if the Caption option has not been
selected.
Minimize boxHides or displays the standard Windows close box in the upper-right corner
of the window. This option is unavailable if the System menu option has not been selected.
(G) Runtime Options. (Graphic window only) Use the items in the Runtime Options group to
configure how the window opens when the project is run in PAC Display Runtime. Select or deselect
the following options:
Always in memory (fastest access)If selected, the windows information is loaded and
saved in the computers memory when the project runs. Use this option for a window that you
know will be opened and closed often. This option is selected automatically if you place an
alarm graphic in a window.
Normally, only windows that have been opened or iconified are saved in memory. If you use
this option with many windows, more computer memory is required, and your PAC Display
project will require more time to start up. Using this option with fewer windows uses less
memory, and your project will start up more quickly.
Open when there are new alarmsIf selected, a closed or iconified window that contains
an alarm graphic will open when the alarm is triggered. This option is only available if a
window contains an alarm graphic that is set to summary or detailed view. For more
information on configuring alarms, see Adding Alarm Graphics on page 279.
Disable close if there are active alarmsIf selected, prevents an open window that
contains one or more active alarms from being closed. All active alarms in a window must be
acknowledged before the window can be closed. For more information on working with
alarms, see Viewing Alarm Graphics on page 330, Modifying Alarm Points on page 331, and
Disabling Alarm Points in Runtime on page 333.
Allow control engine switchingIf selected, all graphics in the window can use data from
the same PAC Control strategy running on a different control engine. The operator switches
between control engines in Runtime. For more information on using data from multiple control
engines, see Switching a Window between Control Engines on page 329.
(H) Password Protect. To assign a password to a window, click here and then enter a password
in the dialog box that appears. When a password is assigned to a draw window, a closed window
cannot be opened without first entering the password. (Open windows that are iconified or hidden
are not affected.)
You cannot assign a password to a window that both contains an alarm and has the Runtime option
Open when there are new alarms selected.
(I) Behavior. Use the options in the Behavior group to set how the window appears on-screen
when the project is run in PAC Display Runtime. Select one of the following options:
Childprevents the window from being moved or minimized outside the boundaries of the
main project window.
97
97
Popuplets the window be moved or minimized outside of the main project window.
(J) Background Color. (Graphic window only) To set the background color of a window, click
the color square and then select a color in the dialog box that appears.
(K) OK. Click OK to save your settings.
2. Click the name of the window you want to open or close, and then click OK.
See the next section to learn how to select or deselect multiple window names.
Other ways of opening and closing windows include the following:
To open a window that has been opened previously, select its name from the bottom of the
Windows menu.
To close a window in which the system menu appears, click the Close Window button
in
the upper-right corner.
To select individual window names, hold down the SHIFT key and click each window name.
To easily close or open all but one window, click on a single name and then click Inverse.
Exporting Windows
To export a window in a PAC Display project, do the following:
1. Select the window in your PAC Display project that you want to export.
The window must be open within the Configurator window.
98
3. Navigate to the location where you want to save the exported window file, name the file, and
then click Save.
Importing Windows
To import a window in a PAC Display project, do the following:
1. Select Window > Import Window.
The Import Window dialog box opens.
2. Navigate to the location where the exported window file is saved, select the file, and then click
Open.
The Choose Imported Window Control Engines dialog box opens.
The left pane lists control engines configured in the imported window. The right pane lists
control engines configured for the current project.
99
99
b. Click OK.
The Window Properties dialog box appears.
4. In the Name field, change the default name Imported Window to a suitable name for your
project.
5. Change other properties of the window if needed, and then click OK. See Modifying Draw or
URL Windows on page 95 for more information on changing window properties.
The window is added to the PAC Display project.
6. If the new window is not visible in the project window, select Window > Open, choose the
window in the list that appears, and then click OK.
NOTE: When a window is imported into a PAC Display project, the tags used by objects in that window are
not verified for accuracy. Run AutoCorrect tags on the window after importing it. See When To Use
AutoCorrect Tags on page 84 for instructions.
100
was selected.
101
101
Shortcut Key
Additional Keys
ENTER OR
Use
SPACEBAR
Line
\
CTRL
Rectangle
CTRL
SHIFT
SHIFT+CTRL
CTRL
Draw squares with rounded corners with the reference point in the top left corner.
SHIFT
Draw rectangles with rounded corners with the reference point in the center.
SHIFT+CTRL
Draw squares with rounded corners with the reference point in the center.
CTRL
SHIFT
SHIFT+CTRL
Polygon
P
102
Tool
Shortcut Key
Additional Keys
Use
Draw graphs that display both real-time and historical data against time.
See Chapter 8: Working with Trends, for more
information.
Polyline
Bezier Curve
Bitmap
Text
Trend
SuperTrend
Alarm
XY Plot
Table
103
103
Tool
Shortcut Key
Additional Keys
Use
Add a Windows button. See also, Adding a Windows Button or a PID Button on page 120.
Scale Window
Windows Button
Combo Box
PID
URL
W
104
NOTE: If you drag the cursor from left to right, you must completely enclose the object in the selection
box to select it. However, you can also select an object by dragging the cursor from right to left over
only part of the object.
3. After you release the mouse button, several sizing handles and one selection mark appear
around the selected object.
Selection Mark
Sizing Handle
Another way to select several objects is to choose the first graphic using the Select tool, then hold
down the SHIFT key and click on each additional object you want included in the selection group.
Notice that a selection handle appears on each object you add to your group of objects.
105
105
To deselect an object within a group of selected objects, hold down the SHIFT key and click on
the object you dont want to include.
To select only one object within a group of selected objects, hold down the CTRL key and click
on the object. This deselects all other objects.
106
To change the opaque or transparent attributes of a line, select the appropriate attribute
from the Style menu. Note that these attributes can be applied only to non-solid lines with
a line width of one pixel.
107
107
The transparent attribute lets an objects color show between the dashes in a line, and the
opaque attribute lets the background color of the window show between the dashes in a
line. Samples of opaque and transparent line attributes are shown in the example below.
Opaque
Transparent
Importing Graphics
You can easily import bitmap graphics, Windows Metafile graphics, or JPEG and PNG images into a
PAC Display window to enhance or add detail to your operator interface. For your convenience, PAC
Display also includes the Symbol Factory, a large library of graphics designed especially for industrial
applications.
108
In this section:
Importing a Bitmap Graphic (below)
Importing a Metafile, JPEG, or PNG Graphic on page 109
Importing a GIF Graphic on page 110
Importing a Graphic from the Symbol Factory on page 110
109
109
IMPORTING GRAPHICS
Animated GIFs appear as static GIFs in Configurator, displaying only the first frame of the
animation. Animation occurs in Runtime.
The GIF image's transparent color may not be set or changed in PAC Display. Use another
image editing program to change the transparent color before importing the image into PAC
Display.
The only Control Engine Driven attribute that may be applied to GIF images is Visibility/Blink.
The only options are Visible and Invisible. Blink options are not available for GIF images.
2. Browse through the categories and thumbnails of graphics until you find the graphic that you
want to use.
3. Click the graphic and drag it into the PAC Display draw window.
You can also select Edit > Paste as Picture (.wmf ) Only.
The selected graphic is now available as a Metafile graphic in the active draw window. The Symbol
Factory window will remain open until you close it, or until you exit PAC Display Configurator.
2. Browse through the categories and thumbnails of graphics until you find the graphic that you
want to use.
3. Click the graphic and then select Edit > Copy.
110
4. Switch to the PAC Display draw window and select Edit > Paste.
The selected graphic is now available as a bitmap graphic in the active draw window. The Symbol
Factory window will remain open until you close it, or until you exit PAC Display Configurator.
1. Use the Select tool to select the graphic you want to save as a bitmap.
If you dont select a graphic, the entire active window will be saved as a bitmap file.
2. Select File > Save as Bitmap.
3. In the Save As Bitmap dialog box that appears, navigate to the desired folder and enter a file
name. (You can enter a three-letter extension other than .bmp, but the file will still be saved as
a bitmap image.)
4. Click Save to save the image.
111
111
4. Choose Edit > Paste. (The keyboard shortcut for this command is CTRL+V. You can also
right-click and choose Paste from the pop-up menu.)
The clipboard contents are pasted in the center of the active window.
Duplicating an Object
1. Select one or more objects.
2. Choose Edit > Duplicate. (The keyboard shortcut for this command is CTRL+D. You can also
right-click and choose Duplicate from the pop-up menu.)
A copy of the graphic is placed immediately below the selected graphic. Note that the contents
of the Windows clipboard are not affected by duplicating an object.
Moving Graphics
1. Choose one or more objects to move using the Select tool
.
2. To move an object, click the object (but not on a sizing handle) and drag it to the new position.
You cant drag objects from one window to another. You must copy or cut objects to move
them between windows.
Moving object
from here...
...to here.
112
2. To resize an object, position the pointer over a square handle, click, and drag.
As illustrated below, the pointer turns into an arrow, and the size of the object changes relative
to the sizing handle youre dragging.
3. When the object(s) are the size you want, release the mouse button.
113
113
3.
4.
5.
6.
9. Grab the border of the active window to resize both the window and the graphics inside. The
new size is shown in the Toolbox.
NOTE: If you click in or try resize a different window, or if you move the cursor back inside the drawing
area of the active window, the Scale Window reverts to the Select tool.
114
Reshaping Graphics
You can adjust the individual points that make up a polyline, polygon, or Bezier curve object.
2. Choose Edit > Z-Order and select one of the following menu items:
Bring to Front
Move Forward
Send to Back
Move Backward
You can also right-click on an object, choose Z-Order from the pop-up menu, and select a
command.
As shown below, if you select Bring to Front, the graphic is moved to the front of other
graphics. Likewise, if you select Send to Back, the graphic is moved behind other graphics. The
commands Move Forward and Move Backward work similarly, except that the object you select
is moved ahead or behind one graphic, not all graphics in the window.
115
115
DELETING OBJECTS
Deleting Objects
There are several ways to delete an object in a window. Depending on the commands you use, the
method you choose may affect the contents of the Windows clipboard.
1. Select one or more objects. (Use Edit > Select All to select all objects.)
2. Delete the graphics using one of the following methods:
To cut an object and save it in the Windows clipboard so you can use it elsewhere, choose
Edit > Cut, or press SHIFT+DEL, or press CTRL+X, or right-click and choose Cut from the
pop-up menu.
You can paste the object into another window or elsewhere in the same window.
To permanently delete an object, choose Edit > Delete, or press the DEL key, or right-click
and choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
The objects are not copied to the clipboard and cannot be retrieved.
Aligning Graphics
You can align selected objects based on common edges, or based on common centers through
objects. You can also adjust the space between objects.
1. Select the objects you want to align.
You have to select at least two objects to enable this command.
2. Select the Edit > Align command and choose an option to base the alignment on. (You can
also right-click and choose Align from the pop-up menu.)
The following illustration shows the results of applying the different alignment options:
Before Alignment
116
Rotating Objects
You can rotate the following objects: Bitmaps, Metafiles, Curves, Polygons, Ellipses, Polylines, JPEGs,
PNGs, Rectangles, Lines, and Text.
To rotate an object or a group of objects:
1. Select one or more objects.
2. Choose Edit > Flip/Rotate > Rotate to open the Rotate Object dialog box.
3. For one object:
Enter the degrees of rotation, then click OK.
117
117
FLIPPING OBJECTS
Rotate each object individually rotates each object the specified number of degrees around
its own center.
Rotate all objects around center of group rotates each object around the center point of all
the selected objects
Unrotated objects
Flipping Objects
You can flip the following objects: Curves, Polygons, Ellipses, Polylines, Rectangles, and Lines.
To flip an object around a central horizontal or vertical axis:
1. Select one or more objects.
2. Choose Edit > Flip/Rotate and select an option, or right-click and choose Flip/Rotate from the
pop-up menu.
To flip a graphic from right to left (or vice versa), choose Flip Horizontal.
To flip a graphic from top to bottom (or vice versa), choose Flip Vertical.
118
Adding Text
1. Choose the Text tool from the toolbox, or right-click and select Text from the pop-up menu.
2. Click the cursor where you want to place your text.
You can also choose to place the text somewhere other than its final location, work on the text
until its ready to use, and then move it to the desired location.
3. Type the text.
4. When youre done with the text you want to type, click outside the text area.
The text youve just typed is now an object, and you can select it and manipulate it like other
objects.
Editing Text
1. With the Select tool, choose the text object you want to modify.
2. Choose Edit > Edit Text, or right-click and choose Edit Text from the pop-up menu.
3. Enter the new text in the Edit Text dialog box that appears, then click OK.
The text object is now modified with the new text.
Formatting Text
1. With the Select tool, choose the text object you want to modify.
2. Choose a formatting option from the Text menu, or right-click the text object and select an
option from the pop-up menu. The following formatting options are available:
FontChanges the font family used for the text in a text object. You can use any fixed or
TrueType font family installed on the computer.
SizeChanges the size of the characters in a text object.
ColorDefines the color in which the text appears.
BackgroundDefines the color of the area directly behind a text object. This formatting
option is only visible when the Opaque attribute is selected.
119
119
120
4. To add a label to the button, right-click and select Edit Text from the pop-up menu.
The Set Button Text dialog opens.
5. Enter the text, and then click OK.
If you want to add controller-driven dynamic text, see Assigning a Control-Driven Dynamic
Attribute to Windows Button Text on page 122.
The new label appears on the button.
6. To change the font on the label, right-click on the button and select Change Font from the
pop-up menu.
NOTE: Buttons cannot be grouped or have their Z-order changed.
In this section:
Assigning Operator-Driven Dynamic Attributes to a Windows Button
Configuring a PID Button
121
121
NOTE: The focus-frame enabled option is disabled for Windows buttons, since Windows automatically
highlights the button when the mouse is moved over it. For more information on the Focus-frame
enabled option, see Assigning a Dynamic Attribute to a Graphic on page 140.
Text In from
Control Engine
NOTE: You must have entered a pound sign on the Windows button in the previous step. Otherwise,
the "Text In from Control Engine" option is not displayed.
4. Double-click Text In from Control Engine to configure this control engine-driven dynamic
attribute. See Text In from Control Engine on page 172 for specific instructions.
122
I/O unit
PID
Part of the PAC Display Runtime PID Window is a SuperTrend that plots the Input, Output and
Setpoint values.
2. Enter the minimum and maximum values to display on the SuperTrend that appears the PAC
Display Runtime PID Window.
The PID SuperTrend plots the Input, Output, and Setpoint values. In general, you should obtain
the initial values from the control strategy, but you can modify them to suit your needs.
NOTE: these values are for the SuperTrend display only. The values configured in the PAC Control
strategy are not changed.
123
123
Graphics and Dynamic Attributes on page 148). PID button security allows only certain users
to be able to launch the Runtime PID Window.
NOTE: PID Buttons may not be grouped with other PAC Display graphics or have their Z-order
changed.
For information on using a PID button in Runtime, see Using a PID Button on page 338.
124
NOTE: The height of the combo is fixed and cannot be changed. Using the Select tool, you can only
change the width.
Send Value
Send Discrete
Send String
Window
Download Recipe
Upload Recipe
Launch Application
NOTE: The operator-driven dynamic attribute Read and Clear cannot be used with a combo box.
See the following two sections to add a list item to a combo box, and then assign one or more
dynamic attributes to the item.
Adding a List Item to a Combo Box (below)
Assigning One or More Dynamic Attributes to a Combo Box List Item on page 127
125
125
Youll add individual list items for the combo box to the Items text box.
2. Click the Add button to open the Add Entry dialog box.
126
To modify the text of an item, click the Modify button, make changes to the text, and then click
OK.
If there is more than one item in the list and you want to re-arrange the order of the items,
select the item you want to move and click the Move Up or Move Down button.
Follow the instructions in the next section to assign one or more dynamic attributes to an item.
Dynamic
Attributes
controls
NOTE: If no Text-in from control engine placeholder character (#) is embedded in the text, the Text In
fields are disabled. See Text In from Control Engine on page 172 for more information.
127
127
As mentioned previously, you can assign one or more dynamic attributes to each entry in the
list. For example, Download peanut butter cookie recipe item may have a Send Value, a Send
Discrete, and a Download Recipe assigned to it.
2. To configure a dynamic attribute, click the link for the desired attribute.
This opens a Dynamic Attribute dialog box for that specific attribute.
128
Dynamic
attribute
selected
Security button
Change Font opens the standard font dialog box. If you change the size of the text, the height
of the combo box is changed to accomodate the new size.
Multiply Runtime Height By... increases the space beneath each item in the list by a factor of
1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. This does not change the text height, nor does it change the size of the closed
comb box. Note that there is no visible change in Configurator because there are no items in
the list in Configurator. They only get added in Runtime.
129
129
Example 1: The combo box has the default font, but has a Runtime Height Multiplier of 2. This
results in additional space between each item, but the combo box size stays the same.
Example 2: The font has changed to Myriad Pro 16, but the Height Multiplier has the default value
of 1. The result is that the text is larger and so is the size of the combo box. The spacing between
items remains unchanged.
Example 3: As in example 2, the font has changed to Myriad Pro 16. However, the Height
Mulitplier is now 3. The combo box will be the same size as in example 2, but the spacing between
each item increases by a factor of 3.
130
Security is applied to all configured dynamic attributes of the item. However, in Runtime, the
Security dialog will appear only once per selected list item. For example, if a single entry has
Send Value, Send String and Menu Item, rather than the security dialog appearing three times
(once per dynamic attribute) it appears only once for the list item.
Security attributes may be copied and pasted from one item to another
Once security has been configured for a dynamic attribute, the security may be copied and pasted
to other entries in the Items list as described below.
To copy and paste security attributes from one item to another:
1. Open the Dynamic Attributes dialog box for the Combo Box.
2. Select an item that has one or more dynamic attributes assigned to it.
3. Right-click on the item and choose Security > Copy Security Attributes from the pop-up menu.
4. Right-click on a different item and choose Security > Paste Security Attributes from the pop-up
menu.
NOTE: The Focus-frame enabled option is disabled for combo boxes, since Windows automatically
highlights the combo box when the mouse is moved over it. For more information on the Focus-frame
enabled option, see Assigning a Dynamic Attribute to a Graphic on page 140.
131
131
NOTE: Combo boxes may not be grouped with other PAC Display graphics or have their Z-order
changed.
1. If your toolbox is not visible, select View > Toolbox to open the toolbox.
132
4. Using the Select tool, double-click the control to open the URL Control dialog box.
5. Enter the target URL, then click OK.
The URL you entered appears in the center of the control to show which webpage will be
loaded in Runtime.
In Runtime, the browser will look like this:
133
133
134
For more information about groov, see form 2027, the groov Users Guide.
Creating a Table
1. Select the Table tool in the toolbox.
2. Click the mouse button, drag the mouse to the desired size, and then release the mouse
button.
The table object appears.
135
135
Configuring a Table
After creating a table object in a draw window, you must specify which table(s) will be displayed. For
each table, you can optionally specify which table elements will be displayed.
1. Double-click the table object with the Select tool.
The Configure Table dialog box appears.
2. In the Appearance section, choose the background color and font used in the table object.
To select background color, click the white square next to Background Color, select a color
in the Windows color selector that appears, and then click OK.
To select the font used, click Font, select a font in the Windows font selector that appears,
and then click OK. If you want the header of each table column to use the font you
selected, select Use same font for header.
When Use Relative Offsets is selected, all table data will begin at the top row of the table
control, regardless of which actual data table index is being displayed.
For example, if Table 1 is configured to show elements 0 50 of a table, and Table 2 is
configured to show elements 200-250 of different table, then the top row of the table
control for Table 1 corresponds to the data at element 0, but the top row of the table
control for Table 2 corresponds to the data at element 200.
136
NOTE: If the Use Relative Offsets option is selected, in Runtime, no Index column is
displayed in the table control, only the table data itself.
3. In the Configure Tables section, click the Table button for each table you want to configure. The
Configure Tables dialog box appears.
To align a table, select the appropriate option for left, center, or right-justified data.
To view discrete bits or digital point states stored in an Integer 64 value, select Hexidecimal
to see four bits at a time, or select Binary to see each bit or point state.
137
137
PRINTING GRAPHICS
To configure the number of floating point decimal places to be displayed in the table,
select a value from 0 to 6.
To learn more about configuring tags in your project, see Configuring Tags on page 75.
5. Click OK to exit the Configure Tables dialog box and return to the Configure Table dialog box.
6. The Allow Edit option is selected by default and allows the operator to click on a cell in the
table in Runtime and enter a new value. To prevent an operator from doing this, deselect this
option.
7. To require a password to edit a table, select the tables Allow Edit option, then click Password. In
the dialog that appears, enter the password, confirm it, then click OK.
8. If you want to display another table in the table object, click another Table button, otherwise
click OK to complete the configuration.
9. If you want to delete a table, click the button with an X on it next to the appropriate Table
button. You can delete either a configured table or one that you are currently configuring or
modifying.
Printing Graphics
To print the displayed windows, select File > Print to display the Print dialog box. If the settings are
correct for your printer, click OK.
If you need to change printer settings, click the Properties button in the Print dialog box. You can
also change the printer settings without printing the Configurator screens by selecting the File >
Printer Setup command.
138
Introduction
This chapter describes how to animate graphics to show how I/O data and other values change in
real time. It also describes how PAC Display scans data from control engines to update its graphics,
and how you can adjust this scanning to optimize your PAC Display project for best performance.
In This Chapter
Assigning a Dynamic Attribute to a Graphic............................. 140
Assigning Operator-Driven Sub-Attributes................................ 146
Security Settings for Graphics and Dynamic Attributes....... 148
Available Dynamic Attributes .......................................................... 151
Copying and Deleting Dynamic Attributes ............................... 181
Viewing Tags and Dynamic Attributes......................................... 182
Scanning to Update Graphics.......................................................... 183
139
139
Operator-driven attributes are assigned to a graphic object. These attributes change the graphic
as an operator interacts with the interface. As a result, events may be triggered, or new tag values
may be sent to an attached control engine. For example, if an operator clicks a graphic that looks like
a button, a valve is closed.
1. Choose the Select tool from the toolbox and double-click the graphic to which you want to
assign a dynamic attribute. (You can also click the graphic once and Edit > Edit Dynamic
Attributes.)
NOTE: Dynamic attributes can only be assigned to one object at a time. If you want several objects to
have the same attributes, select the objects, and then choose Edit > Group to make them one object.
(You can also right-click on the selected graphics and choose Group from the pop-up menu.)
Remember that if you ungroup the objects, the attributes you configured when they were a group
arent retained.
The Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box appears.
At the top of the dialog box is a brief description of the item selected, including its location (x
and y coordinates) and dimensions (width and height) in the draw window. You can change
the location and dimensions of the graphic by entering new values in place of the current ones.
(You cant change the dimensions of a text graphic.)
2. To include hint text that is displayed when the mouse is hovered over the graphic in Runtime,
click the Hint button to open the Hint Text dialog box. For more information, see Adding Hint
Text to a Graphic on page 145. Note that hint text only works with basic graphics such as lines,
rectangles, ellipses, and text.
140
3. Choose an attribute you want to configure in either the Control Engine-Driven Attributes or
Operator-Driven Attributes list, and then click the Edit button for that list.
The dialog box that appears will differ depending on the attribute you selected. The options
and features of each attribute are covered in detail in Available Dynamic Attributes on
page 151.
NOTE: For the Operator Driven Attributes Send Value, Send Discrete, and Send String you can assign
mutiple sub-attributes. For more information, see Assigning Multiple Dynamic Attributes to a
Graphic on page 146.
4. Configure the attribute as required, and then click OK to return to the Graphic Dynamic
Attributes dialog box.
5. If you made any changes to operator-driven attributes, complete these options:
Focus-frame enabledIf this option is checked, a light border will appear around the
graphic in Runtime when the operator moves the cursor over it. This border can be used as
a visual aid to let the operator know that an event will occur when the graphic is clicked.
(You must still configure additional dynamic attributes for the graphic so these events can
occur.)
Beep enabledIf this option is checked, the operator will hear a beep when the graphic
is clicked. Use this as an audio confirmation.
Hot KeyThis feature associates a keystroke sequence with a graphic that has a dynamic
attribute assigned and configured. A hot key is a key on the keyboard that, when pressed
(sometimes in combination with an optional CTRL or SHIFT key), will activate the associated
graphics operator-driver attributes. This lets the operator use a keystroke sequence instead
of using the mouse to click on the graphic, allowing PAC Display Runtime to be operated
without a mouse or similar device.
NOTE: The hot key will work only for graphics that are in an opened or minimized window;
closed windows will not be affected.
6. To configure operator security for this graphic object, click Security. See Security Settings for
Graphics and Dynamic Attributes on page 148 for configuration information.
7. To clear an attribute youve configured, simply highlight the attribute and click Clear.
You should see an empty checkbox beside the attribute. Sometimes after you configure an
attribute and return to the Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box, the Not Available indicator
appears in the checkbox for another attribute. This symbol means that you cannot
configure that type of dynamic attribute for this object as a result of the attribute you just
configured.
8. When youre done configuring dynamic attributes for this object, click OK to save your settings
and close the dialog box.
141
141
Make sure the new tag name is the same item type. For example, if a strategy contains two
Integer32 variables called MyInt_1 and MyInt_2, as well as a float variable called MyFloat, you
are allowed to change MyInt_1 to MyInt_2 because they are both Integer32 variables.
However, changing MyInt_1 to MyFloat will result in an error because MyFloat is a different
item type.
Only modify pre-existing tags. You cannot create a new tag by entering the name. If no tag has
been configured, double-clicking on the tag name field will sound a beep, and the field will
remain read-only.
If the existing tag has a field attribute (such as Pid.Setpoint or ControlEngine.Date), you can
only change the field attribute.
For example, ControlEngine.Date is a string tag and has a field attribute ( .Date ). You cannot
change ControlEngine.Date to My_String_Variable, even though both are string types. You can
only change the .Date field attribute to .Time, .StrategyName, etc. This applies to Pids and
other tags that have field attributes.
To edit a tag:
1. On a Dynamic Attribute dialog box, double-click in the Name field.
Double-click in
the Name field
A message box warns that Opto 22 does not recommend manually changing the tag name.
2. Click OK, and then edit the name using the guidelines detailed above.
3. Click OK.
If the name is not valid, a message appears.
142
4. Click OK to exit the message dialog, and then enter a valid tag name, or select a valid tag name
in the usual manner.
3. Under Cutoff values, enter the values as shown above. Each value (except 0, which is a
placeholder) correlates to one of the following chart states.
Value
Chart State
Stopped
143
143
Value
Chart State
Suspended
Running
3. Under Source, select either Fixed data or Prompt for data. For Fixed Data, enter one of the
following values:
Value
Chart State
Stop
Suspend
Start
Continue
144
4. Configure a tag for this dynamic attritute, then click OK. (See also, Configuring Tags on
page 75.)
5. Click OK again to close the dialog box.
1. Double-click the graphic object to which you will provide hint text. This opens the Graphic
Dynamic Attributes dialog box.
2. On the right side of the Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box, click the Hint... button to open
the Hint Text dialog box.
the portions of text beginning with Yellow and Red will each wrap to the next line. In
Runtime, the Tooltips box in Runtime will appear like this:
4. Click OK
5. Choose Configure > Runtime to open the Runtime Setup dialog box.
145
145
6. On the Control Engine tab, select Allow Runtime Tooltips, then click OK.
146
Available
sub-attribute
4. Select the item marked <available>, and then click Edit to configure a new Send Value
sub-attribute for this graphic.
A second Send Value sub-attribute is now available.
Second
available
sub-attribute
The Send Value item is now displayed in a bold italic font. This indicates that the dynamic
attribute has at least one sub-attribute configured. As more sub-attributes are added,
additional <available> items appear in the attribute tree. If you collapse the Send Value item,
you can still see the sub-attributes by hovering over Send Value.
Tooltip shows
sub-attributes
147
147
Reordering Sub-Attributes
Dynamic sub-attributes are sent to the device in the order displayed in the list. To change the order
of the sends, select a sub-attribute, and then drag it to a new position in the list.
NOTE: Only sub-attributes can be reordered. A parent attribute (such as Send Value) cannot be moved.
Top-most attribute
to be cleared
First sub-attribute
becomes the new
top Send Value
attribute
Clear All Attributes clears the top-most attribute and all sub-attributes below it.
148
individual onscreen graphic objects. This authentication is based on the users and groups defined in
a Microsoft Windows domain or a standalone workgroup.
When the PAC Display project is run in PAC Display Runtime, an operator who clicks on an object
with security permissions is prompted to enter a Windows network username and password, or the
logon password for the standalone PC. If the login information is incorrect, or if the operator is not
permitted to use that object, an alert message is displayed. If runtime operator logging is active for
the project, the login attemptsuccessful or notwill be added to the runtime operator log.
In this section:
Important Considerations for User- and Group-Level Security Settings (below)
Define Security Permissions Dialog Box on page 150
Copying Security Permissions from one Graphic to Another on page 151
By default, all operators have permission to use an object. It isnt necessary to configure
security if all operators will have permission to change the tag value for the object.
Security permissions cannot be configured for the Send Discrete dynamic attribute when it is
configured as Direct or Reverse. See Send Discrete on page 167 for descriptions of these
options.
When the project is running in PAC Display Runtime and an object is clicked, Deny Access
security permissions have priority over Grant Access permissions. This means that if a user has
been granted access, but is a member of a group that has been denied access, the user will not
be able to use the onscreen object.
2. Double-click an operator-driven attribute that you want to use, configure it as needed, and
then click OK.
NOTE: Security permissions are not applied to individual dynamic attributes, but are applied to all
dynamic attributes selected before you click the Security button. If a graphic object needs to have
multiple dynamic attributes, make sure to select and configure all attributes before configuring
security settings.
In the Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box that is again visible, the Security button is now
active.
149
149
3. Click Security to configure user- and group-level authentication for the graphic object.
The Define Security Permissions dialog box opens.
A
B
C
D
(A) Domain. Select the Windows network domain that contains the users and/or groups to
whom you want to grant or deny access to the graphic object.
(B) User/Groups. Select the Windows user or group to whom you want to grant or deny access
to the object.
(C) Permissions. For the selected user or group, select Grant Access or Deny Access.
(D) Show Configured Users. Click Show Configured Users to view all permissions currently
assigned for the graphic object.
(E) Clear All. Click Clear All to erase all configured permissions for the graphic object.
(F) OK. Click OK to save changes, or keep Cancel to close the dialog box without any changes
being made.
150
Dynamic Attribute
Type
control engine-driven
control engine-driven
operator-driven
operator-driven
control engine-driven
control engine-driven
control engine-driven
operator-driven
operator-driven
control engine-driven
operator-driven
control engine-driven
operator-driven
operator-driven
operator-driven
control engine-driven
control engine-driven
151
151
Dynamic Attribute
Type
operator-driven
control engine-driven
control engine-driven
operator-driven
control engine-driven
operator-driven
Alarm Point
Use this attribute to change the color of a graphic object based on the state of an alarm point. You
can use this attribute with circles, rectangles, and polygons. By default, the color of the graphic
corresponds to the Normal, or unalarmed, state. See also, Configuring Alarm Points on page 261
and Configuring Project Alarms on page 283
Double-click Alarm Point in the Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the Dynamic
Attributes-Control Alarm Point dialog box.
(A) Alarm Points. The names of the alarm points configured for the project appear here. Click an
alarm point in the list, and then set the colors that will be used for the graphic object in the Discrete
group or the Value group.
Alarm points that monitor digital points are configured as discrete alarm points, and have four
states: On, Off, Acked, and Silenced. Alarm points that monitor analog points are configured as value
alarm points, and have six states: HiHi, Hi, Normal, Lo LoLo, Acked, and Silenced. See Configuring
Alarm Points on page 261 for more information about setting up alarm points.
152
(B) Discrete. To select colors for a discrete alarm points On and Off states, click the color box for
each state and then choose a color in the dialog box that appears. If you have selected an alarm
point for a digital I/O point, only the Discrete group will appear in the Dynamic Attribute - Alarm
Point dialog box.
(C) Value. To select colors for a value alarm points HiHi, Hi, Normal, Lo LoLo, Acked, and Silenced
states, click the color box for each state and then choose a color in the dialog box that appears. If
you have selected an alarm point for an analog I/O point, only the Value group will appear in the
Dynamic Attribute - Alarm Point dialog box.
Most Critical
Attached
Last Known
Value
Comm
Failure
Double-click Control Engine Status in the Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the
Dynamic Attributes-Control Engine Status dialog box.
153
153
B
C
(A) Select Controller. The names of the control engines configured for the project appear here.
Select a control engine. To select multiple control engines, hold down the CTRL key and click each
one you want to select.
(B) Select All. To select all control engines in the list, click Select All.
(C) Colors. To select colors for a control engines state, click the color box for the state and then
choose a color in the dialog box that appears.
Download Recipe
Use this attribute to download a recipe file to a control engine when a graphic is clicked. This is an
operator-driven attribute and is available for rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, polygons,
bitmaps, and text. For more information about recipes, see Recipes on page 246.
Double-click Download Recipe in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the
Dynamic Attribute - Download Recipe dialog box.
154
B
C
D
E
G
Name (Trigger-based recipe download). Enter a name for this recipe. This name is used to
refer to this trigger-based recipe in the Recipe Managers list dialog box. The name can be up to 40
characters long.
(A) Directory. Enter the directory location of the recipe file. Use the Browse button B to quickly
enter a directory name.
(B) Browse. Click to quickly find the recipe file directory for A. Use the Select Download File
Directory dialog box that appears to navigate to the desired directory, and then click OK.
(C) Make Path Relative to Project. When selected, if you copy the project and recipe files to a
different computer, PAC Display will look in the same relative location to find the recipe files in
Configurator and Runtime.
(D) File Name. Choose the source of the recipe file name:
Fixed Name
Check this if the recipe file is a file name you want to configure at this time. If this option is
selected, the File Name edit box appears, prompting you for a file name. Make sure the file
exists in the Directory entry, otherwise an error is posted. The file name may not be changed at
Runtime.
The Extension parameter also appears and prompts for a one to three character long extension
that's appended to the Fixed Name. The extension must not contain a period or a DOS wild
card character. The default extension is "rcp".
Prompt For Name
Check this if the recipe file name is to be prompted at Runtime when the trigger occurs. If this
option is selected, the Extension parameter also appears. Enter a one to three character long
extension which does not contain a period or a DOS wild card. This extension is used as a filter
to select which files are displayed when prompting a user for the recipe name at Runtime,
however files with different extensions may be selected.
From Strategy
Check this option if you want to use a string tag name from the control engine strategy to
specify the recipe file name. If this option is selected, the String Name edit box appears,
155
155
prompting for the name of the PAC Control tag name you want to use. Use the "?" button to
enter the tag name from the Tag Selection dialog box.
(E) Fixed Name. If Fixed Name was selected in File Name (D), enter the name of the recipe file
located in Directory (A). Notice the file extension is .rcp.
(F) Extension. Specify the file extension for the recipe files available to this dynamic attribute by
entering the extension in the File Extension field. The extension must be one to three characters
long and must not contain a period or DOS wild card characters.
If Fixed Name is checked, this extension will be appended to the File Name entry to create the name
for the recipe file. If Prompt For Name is checked, this extension will be used as a filter to select the
files for display in a file selection dialog box when PAC Display Runtime executes this dynamic
attribute; however, you may override this filtering if you wish to select a file with a different
extension.
(G) String Name. If From strategy was selected in Fixed Name (D), use the Tag Selection button
to enter a tagname of type string that contains the recipe file name. The Tag Selection dialog
box is displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information
about this dialog box.
See Recipes on page 246 for details on recipe files and downloading and uploading recipes.
156
Select a command from the Menu Item list and click OK. (Click Cancel to close the dialog box
without making any changes.) For more information on the Runtime commands, see Runtime
Menus on page 373.
Fill Color
Use this attribute to change a graphics fill color based on a tag value from the control engine. This is
a control engine-driven attribute and is available for rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, and
polygons.
Double-click Fill Color in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the Dynamic
Attribute - Fill Color dialog box.
157
157
C
D
E
F
G
H
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection Button, B. As this tag
value changes in the PAC Control strategy, its value will determine the color you want.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Setup By. Choose whether the tag youre configuring is a Discrete value (with a value of ON or
OFF), or whether its a Current Value youre looking for. For example, an integer will return a value of
either ON or OFF, so you would choose Discrete. However, a chart will return the following three
values: 1 = stopped, 2 = suspended, or 3 = running, so you would choose Current Value. To change
chart states, use the following parameters: If you choose Discrete, the Discrete group (D) is
highlighted; if you choose Current value, the Cutoff Values group (E) is highlighted.
(D) Discrete. Select the color you want for the ON state by clicking on the color field below ON.
The Color dialog box appears; choose a color and click OK. Repeat this step for the OFF state.
(E) Cutoff Values. Enter a value in each Cutoff Value box to specify the range of values for each
color group configured in the color fields. Values entered must be in increasing order. Each Cutoff
value box must have a numeric value entered or you will get a warning to enter one. After the
warning, the cursor blinks in the first Cutoff Value box requiring a value.
(F) Color Fields. To configure a color for the range set up in Cutoff Values (E), click on a color field.
The Color dialog box appears from which you can choose a color and then click OK to accept.
Repeat this step for each color field you want to change.
158
(G) Hysteresis. Enter a value to be applied to each cutoff value as it moves toward lesser values to
determine the actual value at which the color will change to the next color field.
For example, lets say the cutoff values are 1, 10, 20, and 30, and the color fields are red, yellow,
green, blue, and black. The hysteresis is 3. A tag with a value of 11 is read, corresponding to the color
green. The next tag value read is 9. The graphics color remains green because the value read is
within the hysteresis value of 3, even though a value of 9 is in the yellow range.
Horizontal Position
Use this attribute to adjust the horizontal position of a graphic based on a tag value from the control
engine. This is a control engine-driven attribute and is available for lines, rectangles, round
rectangles, ellipses, and polygons, polylines, curves, bitmaps, and text.
Double-click Horizontal Position in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the
following.
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. As the tag
value changes, the graphics horizontal position is changed.
(B) Tag Selection button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about
configuring this dialog box.
(C) Value at Left/Right. Enter the leftmost and rightmost value for the tagname in A. For
example, if you know your tag values will be from 0 to 100, you may wish to enter a range of 0 to 100
or a subset of this range, such as 0 to 50.
(D) Movement Left/Right. Enter the leftmost and rightmost movement the object can
change. The movement units are in pixels. Suppose your left and right values are 0 and 100, and
159
159
your left and right movements are 0 and 200. When the tag value is 50, the object will be moved
100 pixels to the right.
(E) Reference. Select the reference point for the object. The choices are left, center, and right. The
Horizontal Size (Width) dynamic attribute must also be configured in order for this option to affect
the graphic.
(F) Deadband. Enter a value to be added and subtracted from the previously read tag value to
determine if the graphics movement will actually change. Using our previous example in D, lets say
the deadband is 5. A tag is read and has a value of 50. The next tag reading must be greater than 55
in order for the graphic to move.
(G) OK. Click OK to save your settings.
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. As the tag
value changes in the PAC Control strategy, the graphics width is changed.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
160
(C) Maximum/Minimum Value. Enter the maximum and minimum value for the tagname in
A. For example, if you know your tag values will be from 0 to 100, you may wish to enter a range of 0
to 100 or a subset of this range, such as 0 to 50.
(D) Max/Min Percent Width. Enter the maximum and minimum percentage the object can
change. The percentage range is from 0 to 1,000 percent. Suppose your minimum value is 0 and
your maximum value is 10, and the minimum and maximum percentages range is 0 to 200. When
the tag value is 10, the object will be twice as big as youve originally drawn it. When the tag value is
5, the object will be the same size youve drawn it, which is 100 percent.
(E) Anchor. Enter the anchor point for the object. This is the reference point on the object from
which the graphic changes. The choices are left, center, and right.
(F) Deadband. Enter a value to be added and subtracted from the previously read tag value to
determine if the graphics width will actually change. For example, lets say the values are 0 to 100,
the percentages are 0 to 100, and the deadband is 5. A tag is read and has a value of 10. The next tag
reading must be greater than 15 in order for the graphic to change.
(G) OK. Click OK to save your settings.
Horizontal Slider
Use this attribute to configure a horizontal slider when a graphic is clicked. This is an operator-driven
attribute and is available for lines, rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, polygons, and bitmaps.
Double-click Horizontal Slider in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the
following.
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. The distance
the horizontal slider is moved affects the value sent to the tag in the control engine.
161
161
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Value at Left/Right. Enter the leftmost and rightmost value for the tagname in A. For
example, if you know your tag values can be from 0 to 100, you may wish to enter a range of 0 to
100 or a subset of this range, such as 0 to 50.
(D) Movement Left/Right. Enter the leftmost and rightmost movement the object can
change. The movement units are in pixels. Suppose your left and right values are 0 and 100, and
your left and right movements are 0 and 200. If you move the tag 100 pixels to the right, the tag
value sent will be 50.
(E) Reference. Select the reference point for the object. The choices are left, center, and right.
Note that you must also separately configure the Horizontal Size (Width) dynamic attribute to use
this option.
(F) Deadband. Enter a value to be added and subtracted from the previously read tag value to
determine whether the tag value should be changed.
Using our previous example in D, lets say the deadband is 5. A tag is read and has a value of 50. The
next graphic movement must be greater than 55 in order for the tag value to change.
Launch Application
Use this attribute to start an application when a graphic is clicked. This is an operator-driven
attribute and is available for rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, polygons, bitmaps, and text.
Double-click Launch Application in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display display
the following.
A
C
E
F
B
D
G
H
(A) Working Directory. (Optional) Enter the working directory you want to be in when you start
the application. Use the Browse button B to quickly enter a directory name. If a working directory is
162
not specified, the current PAC Display Runtime directory is used when launching the application.
You can change the working directory at any time.
(B) Browse. Click to find the directory for A. The Working Directory Selection dialog box appears.
Use it to navigate to the desired directory and click OK when youre done.
(C) Command Line. Enter the complete path and file name of the application you want to
launch. Use the Browse button (D) to quickly enter the path.
(D) Browse. Click to find the path and application name for C. The Application Manager
Executable File Selection dialog box appears. Use it to select an application and click Open when
youre done.
(E) Append String. (Optional) Enter the name of a string tag to use to append to the path
entered in Command Line (C). The string appended may be a file name the launched application
should open. Use the Tag Selection button
to choose the tagname. The Tag Selection dialog
box is displayed so you can select a tag. Use the Delete button
to clear an entry you may have
made in this field. Only tag names may be entered. Literal strings are not accepted. If the appended
string is a parameter, a space must be included in the Command Line string to separate it from the
main command line.
(F) Launch Options. Select Single instance to have PAC Display Runtime check whether the
graphic has previously launched an application that is currently running. If the graphic has not
previously started a currently running application, the application will be launched.
Select Multiple instances to allow the graphic to start more than one instance of an application.
Some applications only allow one session of an application to run, while others allow multiple
sessions.
Note that the Single Instance option doesnt limit the number of active sessions of an application
that is launched by other graphics and triggers. For example, if the graphic launches a Microsoft
Word session, that graphic cant launch any other application until the Word session ends. However,
a trigger-based event can launch a second, separate session of Word, so two Microsoft Word
sessions will be running concurrently.
(G) Show Options. Click here to configure how the application window will appear. Your choices
are Normal, Minimized, and Maximized.
Line Color
Use this attribute to change a line color or the line color around a graphic based on a tag value from
the control engine. This is a control engine-driven attribute and is available for lines, rectangles,
round rectangles, ellipses, polygons, polylines, and Bezier curves.
Double-click Line Color in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the following.
163
163
C
D
E
F
G
H
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection Button, B. As this tag
value changes in the PAC Control strategy, its value will determine the color you want.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Setup By. Choose whether the tag youre configuring is a Discrete value (with a value of ON or
OFF), or whether its a Current Value youre looking for. For example, an integer will return a value of
either ON or OFF, so you would choose Discrete. However, a chart will return the following three
values: 1 = stopped, 2 = suspended, or 3 = running, so you would choose Current Value. To change
chart states, use the following parameters: If you choose Discrete, the Discrete group (D) is
highlighted; if you choose Current value, the Cutoff Values group (E) is highlighted.
(D) Discrete. Select the color you want for the ON state by clicking on the color field below ON.
The Color dialog box appears; choose a color and click OK. Repeat this step for the OFF state.
(E) Cutoff Values. Enter a value in each Cutoff Value box to specify the range of values for each
color group configured in the color fields. Values entered must be in increasing order. Each Cutoff
value box must have a numeric value entered or you will get a warning to enter one. After the
warning, the cursor blinks in the first Cutoff Value box requiring a value.
(F) Color Fields. To configure a color for the range set up in Cutoff Values (E), click on a color field.
The Color dialog box appears from which you can choose a color and then click OK to accept.
Repeat this step for each color field you want to change.
164
(G) Hysteresis. Enter a value to be applied to each cutoff value as it moves toward lesser values to
determine the actual value at which the color will change to the next color field.
For example, lets say the cutoff values are 1, 10, 20, and 30, and the color fields are red, yellow,
green, blue, and black. The hysteresis is 3. A tag with a value of 11 is read, corresponding to the color
green. The next tag value read is 9. The graphics color remains green because the value read is
within the hysteresis value of 3, even though a value of 9 is in the yellow range.
A
C
D
E
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the tag selection button B.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here.
The Tag Selection dialog box is displayed so you can select a tag. Only tags that are supported by
the item selected in Action (C) will be available. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more
information about this dialog box.
(C) Action. Choose the item to be read and cleared when the operator clicks the graphic object:
On time total
Latch (ON)
Latch (OFF)
On pulse measure
165
165
Period
Minimum
Maximum
(D) Options. Formatting options for how values appear when read appear here. Depending on
the item you selected in Action (C), one of the following option groups will be available:
Numerical formatsDecimal, binary, hexadecimal, and exponential formats are available for
values returned as numbers (for example, the state of all 32 points on a high-density module).
Text formatsCustom text that corresponds to a discrete values on and off states can be
entered here.
If the Read and Clear dynamic attribute has been assigned to an object, a Text In from Control
Engine dynamic attribute cannot also be assigned to that same object.
If a text placeholder ( ## ) is used to view return values, these placeholder characters will
appear that way in Runtime until the operator triggers the read and clear. Once this has
happened, the graphic will not change until the read and clear is triggered again.
If more than one graphic in a PAC Display window is configured with the same Read and Clear
dynamic attribute, each graphic is treated independently. The graphics are not linked to each
other, so when one graphic is read and cleared, the other graphic will not reflect this.
Rotate
Use this control engine-driven to rotate any of the following objects based on a tag value from the
control engine: Bitmap, Metafile, Curve, Polygon, Ellipse, Polyline, JPEG, PNG, Rectangle, Line, or Text.
NOTE: Dynamic rotation can be a CPU intensive. Use dynamic rotation judiciously.
Double-click Rotate in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the following.
E
G
166
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. As this tag
value changes in the PAC Control strategy, the graphics line rotates.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Value at Max. These fields are used to specify the return data from the tag that will produce
the maximum counterclockwise (CCW) and maximum clockwise (CW) rotation. The Value at Max
CCW may be either less than or greater than the Value at Max CW, so that rotation may proceed in
either direction as the data from the tag increases or decreases. Therefore, the term exceeds is used
below to indicate a value that may be either greater than or less than the CCW or CW Max value.
When the tag returns data that is equal to or exceeds the Value at Max CCW to PAC Display, the
graphic will rotate counterclockwise as far as possible, as specified by the Max CCW Rotation value
explained below. When the tag returns data that is equal to or exceeds the Value at Max CW
Rotation to PAC Display, the graphic will rotate clockwise as far as possible, as specified by the Max
CW Rotation value explained below.
(D) Max Rotation. These fields are used to specify the maximum counterclockwise and
clockwise rotation angle that the graphic may undergo (in degrees from its configured location).
The entered values must be non-negative numbers. The Max CCW Rotation angle is achieved when
the tag returns data that is equal to or exceeds the Value at Max CCW, as explained above. The Max
CW Rotation angle is achieved when the tag returns data that is equal to or exceeds the Value at
Max CW, as explained earlier in this section.
(E) Rotation Anchor Point. The rotation anchor point is used to specify the fixed location that
the graphic rotates around. This location is specified in terms of an offset (in units of pixels) from the
centerpoint of the graphic at its configured location.
In the Horizontal field, enter a negative value to specify a position that is to the left of the configured
location or enter a positive value to specify a position that is to the right of the configured location.
In the Vertical field, enter a negative value to specify a position that is above the configured location
or enter a positive value to specify a position that is below the configured location. If a value of zero
is specified for both fields, then the graphic will rotate about its centerpoint.
(F) Deadband. Enter a value to be added and subtracted from the previously read tag value to
determine if the lines rotation angle should change.
For example, lets say the deadband is 2. A tag with a value of 50 is read. The next tag value read is
51. The line does not rotate because the value read is within the deadband range.
Send Discrete
Use this attribute to send a discrete value to a tag in the control engine when a graphic is clicked.
This is an operator-driven attribute and is available for rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses,
polygons, bitmaps, and text.
Double-click Send Discrete in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the following.
167
167
C
D
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. This tag will
receive the tag value entered by the operator or configured in this dialog box.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Source. Select the source of the value to be sent to the tag. If you select Fixed data, the setting
selected in the Fixed Data field (D) is sent to the tag. If you select Prompt for data, the Prompted
Data field (E) is activated and you can enter a message that will prompt the operator to select a
discrete state for the tag.
(D) Fixed Data. If Fixed Data was selected in Source (C), enter the setting to be sent to the tag.
The Set option turns the tag on; Clear turns the tag off; Toggle changes the tag to the opposite of
its current state (from on to off, or from off to on); Reverse changes the tags state to off when the
mouse is clicked on the graphic, and on when the mouse button is released; Direct changes the tag
state to on when the mouse is clicked on the graphic, and off when the mouse is released.
(E) Prompted Data. If Prompt for Data was selected Source (C), enter a message here that will
prompt the operator to select a tag state. Two buttons will be displayed to the operator. Enter the
labels for the Set Button and the Clear Button. The Set Button sends a discrete value to set the tag to
the on state, and the Clear Button sends a discrete value to set the tag to the off state.
Send String
Use this attribute to send a string to the control engine when a graphic is clicked. This is an
operator-driven attribute and is available for rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, polygons,
168
bitmaps, and text.Double-click Send String in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display
the following.
C
D
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. This tag will
receive the string tag entered by the operator or configured in this dialog box.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Source. Select the source of the value to be sent to the tag. If you select Fixed data, the setting
selected in Fixed Data (D) is sent to the tag. If you select Prompt for data, the field in Prompted Data
(E) is activated and you can enter a message that will prompt the operator to enter a string to send
to the tag.
(D) Fixed Data. If Fixed Data was selected in Source (C), enter the string to send to the tag.
(E) Prompted Data. If Prompt for Data was selected in Source (C), enter a message to prompt
the operator to enter a string. Choose the Hide characters option if you dont want the text entered
by the operator to be displayed.
Send Value
Use this attribute to send a value to a tag name in the control engine when a graphic is clicked. This
is an operator-driven attribute and is available for rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, polygons,
bitmaps, and text.
Double-click Send Value in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the following.
169
169
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. This tag will
receive the tag value entered by the operator or configured in this dialog box.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Source. Select the source of the value to be sent to the tag. If you select Fixed data, the value
entered in the Fixed Data field (E) is sent to the tag. If you select Prompt for data, the Prompted Data
field (F) is activated and you can enter a message that will prompt the operator to input a value to
send to the tag.
(D) Destination. Choose Set to assign the sent value to the tag equal, or choose Offset to add
the value to the tag.
(E) Fixed Data. If Fixed Data was selected in Source (C), enter the value to send to the tag.
This value can be either a decimal or hexadecimal number. If entering a hexadecimal number, the
number must be preceded by 0x and contain no spaces (for example, 0x7FFFFFFF and not 0x
7FFF FFFF).
(F) Prompted Data. If Prompt for Data was selected in Source (C), enter a message to prompt
the operator for a value. Enter a minimum and maximum value the entered data should be within.
IMPORTANT: If using hexadecimal numbers, enter a minimum number of 0x80000000 and a maximum
number of 0x7FFFFFFF.
Text Color
Use this attribute to change the color of text in the interface based on a tag value from a control
engine. This is a control engine-driven attribute and is available for grouped objects and text.
Double-click Text Color in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the following.
170
C
D
E
F
G
H
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection Button, B. As this tag
value changes in the PAC Control strategy, its value will determine the color you want.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Setup By. Choose whether the tag youre configuring is a Discrete value (with a value of ON or
OFF), or whether its a Current Value youre looking for. For example, an integer will return a value of
either ON or OFF, so you would choose Discrete. However, a chart will return the following three
values: 1 = stopped, 2 = suspended, or 3 = running, so you would choose Current Value. To change
chart states, use the following parameters: If you choose Discrete, the Discrete group (D) is
highlighted; if you choose Current value, the Cutoff Values group (E) is highlighted.
(D) Discrete. Select the color you want for the ON state by clicking on the color field below ON.
The Color dialog box appears; choose a color and click OK. Repeat this step for the OFF state.
(E) Cutoff Values. Enter a value in each Cutoff Value box to specify the range of values for each
color group configured in the color fields. Values entered must be in increasing order. Each Cutoff
value box must have a numeric value entered or you will get a warning to enter one. After the
warning, the cursor blinks in the first Cutoff Value box requiring a value.
(F) Color Fields. To configure a color for the range set up in Cutoff Values (E), click on a color field.
The Color dialog box appears from which you can choose a color and then click OK to accept.
Repeat this step for each color field you want to change.
171
171
(G) Hysteresis. Enter a value to be applied to each cutoff value as it moves toward lesser values to
determine the actual value at which the color will change to the next color field.
For example, lets say the cutoff values are 1, 10, 20, and 30, and the color fields are red, yellow,
green, blue, and black. The hysteresis is 3. A tag with a value of 11 is read, corresponding to the color
green. The next tag value read is 9. The graphics color remains green because the value read is
within the hysteresis value of 3, even though a value of 9 is in the yellow range.
E
F
D
G
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. As this tag
changes value in the PAC Control strategy, its value will determine the effects on the graphic. The
tagname you enter is affected by the setting for Setup By (C).
172
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Setup By. Choose whether the tag youre reading is a numeric value, a discrete value (with ON
and OFF values), or a string. If you choose Value, the Deadband and Text Justification fields (D and E)
are activated. If you choose Discrete, the Numerical Format group (F) is activated. The choice you
make in this selection must match the choice you made in Name (A).
If you choose Value, the value read will be converted into a string based on the rules mentioned at
the beginning of this Text In section.
If you choose Discrete, use Numerical Format group (F) to enter the strings that will be displayed for
the ON and OFF states. If you choose String, the text string from the control engine is displayed.
(D) Deadband. If you selected Value in Setup By (C), enter the value to be added and subtracted
from the previously read tag value to determine whether the new value is displayed.
(E) Text Justification. Select the format in which numeric values will be displayed: decimal,
hexadecimal, binary, or exponential. Hexadecimal numbers are prefixed with 0X and appear in
uppercase letters. Float values may not be displayed as hexadecimal or binary.
(F) Numerical Format. Select the text justification for the string from the control engine.
(G) Discrete. This section is highlighted if Discrete was chosen in Setup By (C). Enter the string to
be displayed if the tags discrete value is ON, and enter the string to be displayed if the tags discrete
value is OFF.
(H) OK. Click here to save your settings. (Click Cancel to close the dialog box without making
changes.)
Upload Recipe
Use this attribute to upload a recipe file from a control engine when graphic is clicked. This is an
operator-driven attribute and is available for rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, polygons,
bitmaps, and text. For more information about recipes, see Recipes on page 246.
Double-click Upload Recipe in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the following.
173
173
E
F
G
I
J
L
M
(A) Name. Enter the directory location of the recipe format file. Use the Browse button B to
quickly select a directory name. The recipe format file is used to tell the control engine what data to
read. Often, its the original downloaded recipe. For example, the number of lines with data values
represents how many values should be read from the control engine.
(B) Browse. Click to quickly find the recipe format file directory for A. The Select Format File
Directory dialog box appears. Use it to navigate to the desired directory and click OK when youre
done.
(C) Make Path Relative to Project. When selected, if you copy the project and recipe files to a
different computer, PAC Display will look in the same relative location to find the recipe files in
Configurator and Runtime.
(D) File Name. Choose the source of the recipe format file name:
If you choose Fixed name, the Fixed Name field (E) is highlighted.
If Prompt for name is selected, the operator is prompted for the recipe format file name.
(E) Fixed Name. If Fixed Name was selected in D, enter the name of the recipe format file located
in directory A. Notice the file extension is .rcp.
(F) String Name. If From strategy was selected in D, use the Tag Selection button
to enter a
tagname of type string that contains the recipe format file name. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box. Configuring Tags on page 75
(G) Directory. Enter the directory location of the recipe file that will receive the information. Use
the Browse button (H) to quickly enter a directory name.
174
(H) Browse. Click to quickly find the recipe file directory for G. The Select Destination File
Directory dialog box appears. Use it to navigate to the desired directory and click OK when youre
done.
(I) File Name. Choose the file name for the recipe data that will be read from the control engine.
Fixed NameCheck this if the template file is a file name you want to configure at this time. If
this option is selected, the File Name edit box appears, prompting you for a file name. Make
sure the file exists in the Directory entry, otherwise an error is posted. The file name may not be
changed at Runtime.
The "Extension" parameter also appears and prompts for a one to three character long
extension that's appended to the "Fixed Name". The extension must not contain a period or a
DOS wild card character. The default extension is "rcp".
Prompt For NameCheck this if the template file name is to be prompted at Runtime when
the trigger occurs. If this option is selected, the Extension parameter also appears. Enter a one
to three character long extension which does not contain a period or a DOS wild card. This
extension is used as a filter to select which files are displayed when prompting a user for the
recipe name at Runtime, however files with different extensions may be selected.
From StrategyCheck this option if you want to use a string tag name from the control
engine strategy to specify the template file name. If this option is selected, the String Name
dialog box appears, prompting for the tag name you want to use. Use the "?" button to enter
the tag name from the Tag Selection dialog box.
(J) Fixed Name. If Fixed Name was selected in I, enter the name of the file to receive the
information. This file will be located in the Directory field (G).
(K) Extension. Specify the file extension for the recipe files available to this dynamic attribute by
entering the extension in the File Extension field. The extension must be one to three characters
long and must not contain a period or DOS wild card characters.
If Fixed Name is checked, this extension will append to the File Name entry to create the name for
the recipe file. If Prompt For Name is checked, this extension will be used as a filter to select the files
for display in a file selection dialog box when Runtime executes this dynamic attribute. However,
you may override this filter if you wish to select a file with a different extension.
(L) Mistic String. If From strategy was selected in I, use the Tag Selection button
to enter a
tagname of type string that contains the file name. The Tag Selection dialog box is displayed so you
can select a tag.
(M) OK. Click OK to save your settings.
Vertical Position
Use this attribute to adjust the vertical position of a graphic based on a tag value from the control
engine. This is a control engine-driven attribute and is available for lines, rectangles, round
rectangles, ellipses, and polygons, polylines, curves, bitmaps, and text.
Double-click Vertical Position in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the
following.
175
175
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. As the tag
value changes, the graphics horizontal position is changed.
(B) Tag Selection button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about
configuring this dialog box.
(C) Value at Top/Bottom. Enter the top and bottom values for the graphic. For example, if you
know your tag values will be from 0 to 100, you may wish to enter a range of 0 to 100 or a subset of
this range such as 0 to 50.
(D) Movement Up/Down. Enter the maximum top and bottom movement the object can
change. The movement units are in pixels. For example, if your bottom and top values are 0 and 100,
your bottom and top movements are 0 and 200, and your point of reference (E) is from the bottom
when the tag value is 50, the object will be moved 100 pixels from the bottom.
(E) Reference. Enter the reference point for the object. This is the reference point from which the
object will move. The choices are top, center, and bottom. The Vertical Size (Height) dynamic
attribute must also be configured in order for this option to affect the graphic.
(F) Deadband. Enter a value to be added and subtracted from the previously read tag value to
determine whether the graphics position will actually change. Using our previous example in D,
lets say the deadband is 5. A tag is read and has a value of 50. The next tag reading must be greater
than 55 in order for the graphic to move.
(G) OK. Click OK to save your settings.
176
Double-click Vertical Size in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the following.the
following.
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. As this tag
changes value in the PAC Control strategy, its value will determine the effects on the graphic.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Maximum/Minimum Value. Enter the maximum and minimum value for the tagname in
A. For example, if you know your tag values will be from 0 to 100, you may wish to enter a range of 0
to 100 or a subset of this range, such as 0 to 50.
(D) Max/Min Height. Enter the maximum and minimum percentage the object can change.
The percentage range is from 0 to 1,000. Suppose your minimum value is 0 and your maximum
value is 10, and the minimum and maximum percentages range from 0 to 200. When the tag value
is 10, the object will be twice as big as youve originally drawn it. When the tag value is 5, the object
will be the same size youve drawn it, which is 100 percent.
(E) Anchor. Enter the anchor point from which the object will grow. The choices are Top, Center,
and Bottom. For example, if you want to create a bar that grows up from the bottom, select Bottom.
If you want to create an object that grows both up and down from the center, select Center. An
object with a Top anchor grows down from the top.
(F) Deadband. Enter a value to be added and subtracted from the previously read tag value to
determine whether the graphics height will actually change. For example, lets say the values are 0
to 100, the percentages are 0 to 100, and the deadband is 5. A tag is read and has a value of 10. The
next tag reading must be greater than 15 in order for the graphic to change.
(G) OK. Click OK to save your settings.
177
177
Vertical Slider
Use this attribute to configure a vertical slider when a graphic is clicked. This is an operator-driven
attribute and is available for lines, rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, polygons, and bitmaps.
Double-click Vertical Slider in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the following.
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. The amount
of movement the vertical slider makes affects the value sent to the tag in the control engine.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Value at Top/Bottom. Enter the top and bottom values for the tagname in A. For example,
if you know your tag values can be from 0 to 100, you may wish to enter a range of 0 to 100 or a
subset of this range, such as 0 to 50.
(D) Movement Up/Down. Enter the maximum top and bottom movement the object can
change. The movement units are in pixels. This means if your bottom and top values are 0 and 100,
and your bottom and top movements are 0 and 200, if you move the tag 100 pixels toward the
bottom, the tag value sent will be 50.
(E) Reference. Select the reference point for the object. The choices are top, center, and bottom.
Note that you must also separately configure the Vertical Size (Height) dynamic attribute to use this
option.
(F) Deadband. Enter a value to be added and subtracted from the previously read tag value to
determine whether the tag value should be changed.
Using our previous example in D, lets say the deadband is 5. A tag is written and has a value of 50.
The next graphic movement must be greater than 55 in order for the tag value to change.
178
Visibility/Blink
Use this attribute to make a graphic visible or invisible or to cause it to blink based on a tag value
from the control engine. This is a control engine-driven attribute and is available for lines, rectangles,
round rectangles, ellipses, polygons, polylines, curves, bitmaps, Windows button controls, and text.
Double-click Visibility/Blink in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes dialog box to display the following.
C
D
E
F
G
H
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button B. As this tag
changes value in the PAC Control strategy, its value will determine the effects on the graphic.
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about this
dialog box.
(C) Setup By. Choose whether the tag youre configuring is a discrete value (with ON and OFF
values), or whether its a current value youre looking for. If you choose Discrete, the D group is
highlighted; if you choose Current value, the E group is highlighted. The choice you make in this
selection must match the tag choices you made in the Name field (A).
(D) Discrete. Select the visibility state you want for the ON state from the drop-down list options.
Your choices are Invisible, Visible, Slow Blink, Med. Blink, and Fast Blink. In the same manner, choose
the visibility state for the OFF state.
(E) Cutoff Values. Enter a value in each Cutoff Value field to specify the range of values for each
visibility group configured in the visibility fields. Values entered must be in increasing order. Each
Cutoff Value field must have a numeric value entered or you will get a warning to enter one. After
the warning, the cursor blinks in the first Cutoff Value field requiring a value.
179
179
(F) Visibility. To configure a visibility state for the ranges set up in Cutoff Values (E), click a visibility
fields drop-down button. Your choices are Invisible, Visible, Slow Blink, Med. Blink, and Fast Blink. In
the same manner, choose the visibility state for each range of values.
(G) Deadband. Enter a value to be added and subtracted from the previously read tag value to
determine whether the graphics visibility will actually change.
For example, lets say the Cutoff values are 1, 10, 20, and 30, and the visibility fields are Invisible,
Visible, Slow Blink, Med. Blink, and Fast Blink. The Deadband is 2. A tag is read with a value of 10. The
next value read must be greater than 12 in order for the graphic to change.
Windows
Use the Windows attribute to change window states when a graphic is clicked. This is an
operator-driven attribute and is available for rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, polygons,
bitmaps, and text.
To display the Pop Window dialog box, double-click Windows in the Graphics Dynamic Attributes
dialog box.
A
B
C
D
F
E
G
(A) Windows. Initially, this list shows all the windows available for the project. Select the window
that has the window state you want to change. You can also select more than one window by using
a couple of key combinations. One way is to select a window, press SHIFT, and click on another
window name in the list. This selects all the windows in between the two window names. Another
way is to select a window name, press the CTRL key, and click on each window name you want
selected.
180
(B) Insert. Use to insert the selected window(s) in Action/Affected Windows (D). The window
name will be inserted above the highlighted window(s) in (A).
(C) Append. Use to add the selected window(s) to the bottom of the window list in
Action/Affected Windows (D). The window name will be inserted after the last window in
Action/Affected Windows (D).
(D) Action/Affected Windows. Lists the windows and what window state they will go to
when the graphic is clicked.
(E) Default. Use this group as a handy window state assignment key for the windows youve
highlighted in (A). When the windows are copied over to Action/Affected Windows (D), you will see
they all have the default window state youve assigned. The window state choices are Open, Close,
and Iconify.
(F) New Action. Use this group to change any window states listed in Action/Affected Windows
(D). Highlight one or more windows and select the new window state action. Your choices are
Open, Close, and Iconify.
(G) Remove/Deselect. Use this group to modify the window name list in Action/Affected
Windows (D). The Remove Selected option removes only those windows youve highlighted; the
Remove All option removes all windows from the list; and the Deselect All option deselects and
quickly unhighlights all window names.
(H) All Others. For all windows left in (A), use this grouping to affect their window states. For
example, if a window state is open and the graphic is clicked, the window state can stay the same,
be iconified, or be closed. Likewise, you can alter the window states of closed and iconified
windows.
181
181
182
2. In the dialog box that opens, select one or more windows whose dynamic attributes you want
to view and click OK.
The Microsoft Windows Notepad application opens and displays a report similar to the
following example:
Project Name: C:\Opto22\PAC
Display\Examples\ioCookies\Display\cfactory.uui
---------------------------------------------------------------------Window: Cookie Factory
**********************
GroupX = 530Y = 332W = 86H = 28
Operator-Driven Dynamic Attribute Tags
Send Value:
Cookie Control Engine:Conveyor_Speed_Control.Value
Refresh Group: Group 0
Source
: Prompt for Data
Destination: Set
Message
: Enter Conveyor Speed
Min. Value : 0.00
Max. Value : 100.00
GroupX = 133Y = 213W =
21H =
183
183
Scanning is PAC Displays process of requesting data about I/O points and variables from the
Opto 22 control engine. When the control engine receives this request, it must first determine if its
data for the requested tags is current. If the data is not current, the control engine will access the I/O
units connected to it and request the latest readings. This tag information is then sent back to PAC
Display. Depending on the data and how it is connected to objects in your PAC Display project,
graphic objects then change their attributes.
In this section:
Refresh Time Groups on page 184
Configuring Scan Rates on page 184
Select scan rates that reflect the rate at which the process variables change. For example, the
outside air temperature changes slowly, and could be scanned every 15 minutes or so.
As a good engineering practice, select the slowest possible scan rate that is acceptable for your
application. This will help prevent the system from being overloaded by needlessly scanning
too much information too quickly.
If the amount of data being scanned is too much for the selected scan rate, decrease the scan
rate to better match what the actual throughput will allow.
If you have tried the preceding guidelines and scanning speed does not improve, then there
may be too much data being requested from one control engine, or there may be too much
data being scanned by one computer, or both. To eliminate the bottlenecks, you may need to
add more control engines, divide the PAC Display projects over multiple computers, or both.
184
A
B
C
(A) Group Tabs. Up to fourteen refresh time groups are available, divided between two tabs in
the Refresh Times dialog box.
(B) Name. In the Name column, you will see the refresh time group names. By default, their names
are Group 0", Group 1", and on up to Group 6." You can change these default names if you wish.
Names can be up to 15 characters long, but avoid using the ! and | characters in the name. Spaces
are also valid characters, but when referencing names with spaces, dont omit the spaces or
substitute the _ character for spaces.
(C) Scan Rate. In the Value field of the Scan Rate column, enter a number from 1 to 9999. In the
Units field, select a unit of time from the Units drop-down list. (Unit options are milliseconds,
seconds, minutes, hours, days, and months.)
The greater the value, the more time between I/O readings and the fewer times the control engine
is scanned.
185
185
186
Introduction
This chapter describes how you can create and configure graphs that display real-time and historical
information about selected I/O points.
In This Chapter
About Trends .............................................................. 187
Types of Trends .......................................................... 188
Working With Basic Trends................................... 188
About Trends
PAC Display trends are graphical objects that visually plot control engine values, including I/O points
and results of a calculation. Using a trend, you can show how real-time and historical data changes
over time, or how one set of data relates to another one. In PAC Display Runtime, trends are created
when active I/O point values, or tags, are read from a PAC Control strategy running on a control
engine and visually plotted.
Tag values are graphed on a two-dimensional x-axis and y-axis coordinate system. Depending on
the type of trend used, the x-axis can represent time or a set of tag values. The y-axis can represent
either the range of values for a tag or a set of tag values. You can set features for each trend line
used, and there is no limit to the number of trends that can be displayed in a window. For trends
that graph data over time, the maximum time span supported is 14 days.
You can easily set or modify the following elements in a trend:
X- and y-axis ranges and the major and minor divisions that appear on the chart
Tag value scanning, which can be turned on or off for a specific trend.
187
187
TYPES OF TRENDS
Types of Trends
There are three types of trends that you can use in a PAC Display project: basic trends, SuperTrends,
and XY plots. Basic trends and SuperTrends graph control engine values over time, but support
different numbers of trend lines and have other differences. XY plots graph data from two tables,
using one set of data for x-axis values and the other for y-axis values.
Basic TrendsUsing a basic trend, up to four trend lines can be displayed on any one trend
chart. Unlike a SuperTrend (described below), which can graph historical data, basic trends can
only graph real-time data. See Working With Basic Trends below for more information.
XY PlotsUsing an XY plot, up to six individual trend lines can be displayed on any one XY
plot. XY plots can only graph data in numeric tables. See Using XY Plots on page 213 for more
information.
188
Y-axis Layout
Label Position = Left
Label Range:
- Max Val = 100
- Min Val = 0
Minor Divisions = 4
Major Divisions = 5
Label Intervals = 1
X-axis Layout
Minor Divisions = 2
Major Divisions = 4
Label Intervals = 2
A
B
E
F
G
C
D
H
M
N
O
I
J
K
L
P
Q
189
189
(B) Pen Configuration Buttons. Use these pen configuration buttons to associate each pen
with one PAC Control tag, to define its pen color and width, and to specify a range of values for the
tag. You can configure up to four pens per trend. See Optimizing Pen Settings on page 193 for
more information.
(C) Chart Color. Click here to enter the charts background color. In the Color dialog box that
appears, choose a color and click OK.
(D) Border Color. Click here to enter the charts border color. In the Color dialog box that
appears, choose a color and click OK.
(E) Time Span. Enter the time span the trend represents. (Remember that the time span is
indicated on the x-axis). Choose the time units from the drop-down list. Your choices are seconds,
minutes, or hours. The maximum time span is 14 days, or 336 hours.
(F) Refresh Time. Select the refresh time here. Choose from one of seven refresh time groups.
The scan rate appears in parentheses alongside the refresh group number. All tags associated with
the pens in B are scanned at the same rate.
You can find out more about refresh times in Scanning to Update Graphics on page 183. Also see
Optimizing Pen Settings on page 193 to learn how pen settings affect how PAC Display
communicates with a control engine.
(G) Disable Trend. Choose whether to disable a trend based on the state of its window. If you
disable the trend, the tags associated with the pens in B wont be updated with new data from the
PAC Control strategy until the trend is enabled again. Disabling a trend saves the control engine
processing time, since it doesnt have to respond to regular requests from PAC Display for tag
updates.
NOTE: Trends that are enabled are always updated, regardless of the windows visual state (normal,
iconified, etc.). This means PAC Display continually requests data from the control engine to update its
trends. Keep this in mind when youre considering the number of enabled trends you are including in the
project. The more enabled trends you have, the more the control engine has to spend time reading its I/O
to update the data.
(H) Number of Major Divisions (X Axis). Enter the number of major x-axis divisions for the
trend. This is the number of main sections the trend is divided into. You can also choose a color for
the major divisions by clicking the Color field. In the Color dialog box that appears, choose a color
and click OK.
NOTE: For both x- and y-axis divisions, the lines dividing the major divisions appear thicker than the minor
divisions.
(I) Number of Minor Divisions (X Axis). Enter the number of minor x-axis divisions for the
trend. This will be the number of sections the major divisions are divided into. The minimum
number of divisions is one.
You can also choose a color for the minor x-axis divisions by clicking the Color field. In the Color
dialog box that appears, choose a color and click OK.
190
(J) Label Interval in Major Divisions (X Axis). Enter how often you want the major x-axis
labeled.
NOTE: For both x- and y-axis labels, if you enter 1, every major division is labeled; if you enter 2, every other
major division is labeled.
(K) Label Position (X Axis). Choose the label position for the x-axis. By default, the x-axis is
labeled at the bottom, but you can choose to label the top, top and bottom, or have no labeling at
all.
(L) Label Format (X Axis). Enter the label format by checking off any combination of hours,
minutes, and seconds. The label appears in the following format: HH:MM:SS, where HH is hours, MM
is minutes, and SS is seconds.
(M) Number of Major Divisions (Y Axis). Enter the number of major y-axis divisions for the
trend. This is the number of main sections the trend is divided into. You can also choose a color for
the major divisions by clicking the Color field. In the dialog box that appears, choose a color and
click OK.
(N) Number of Minor Divisions (Y Axis). Enter the number of minor y-axis divisions for the
trend. This will be the number of sections the major divisions are divided into. The minimum
number of divisions is one.
You can also choose a color for the minor y-axis divisions by clicking the Color field. In the Color
dialog box that appears, choose a color and click OK.
(O) Label Interval in Major Divisions (Y Axis). Enter how often you want the major y-axis
labeled.
(P) Label Position (Y Axis). Choose the label position for the y-axis. If you choose Left, Right, or
Left and Right, only pens that fall within the minimum and maximum values of the Label Range are
displayed; pen data outside the range is not displayed.
However, if you choose None, no labels are shown on the y-axis, multiple ranges appear to overlap,
and all pens are displayed. As shown in the following example, if pen A has a range of 0-100 and pen
B has a range of 300-400, the y-axis has a range of 0-100 and 300-400 simultaneously and both pens
are displayed.
191
191
62
Pen 1
Pen 2
305
(Q) Label Range (Y Axis). Enter the minimum and maximum values for the y-axis.
(R) OK. Click OK to save your settings.
B
D
E
(A) Name. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection Button (B).
(B) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag Selection dialog box is
displayed so you can select a tag. See Configuring Tags on page 75 to learn more about
configuring tags in your project.
(C) Maximum/Minimum Value. Enter the maximum and minimum value the tag selected in
A can be.
192
(D) Pen Color. Click here to choose a pen color. In the Color dialog box that appears, choose a
color and click OK.
E) Pen Width. Enter the width of the line you want created by the pen. The width is specified in
pixels.
193
193
For example, the memory required for each pen in a SuperTrend having a six-hour scan time (21,600
sec.) and a 500 ms scan rate (0.5 sec.) would be calculated as follows:
19.2 21600 sec. = 829,400 bytes
0.5 sec.
This is approximately 800 KB for each pen. If this SuperTrend contained five pens, for example, it
would use 4,000 KB of RAM, or just under 4 MB.
Each time you configure a SuperTrend, the approximate amount of RAM required for that object will
be shown.
Creating a SuperTrend
1. Select the SuperTrend tool
from the toolbox and position the cursor where you want the
trend to begin in the window.
2. Click the mouse button, drag the mouse to the desired size, and then release the mouse
button.
The SuperTrend appears.
194
If you do not draw the SuperTrend wide enough, some of the command buttons will be placed
in a second row.
A
C
D
E
G
H
I
(A) Trend Type. Choose the trend type here. If you select Combined, you can switch between
real-time and historical trending when the project is running. In the Color dialog box that appears,
choose a color and click OK.
(B) Size - Position. Enter the X and Y coordinates to position the super trend. Enter the width in
pixels (W) or height (H) to change the size.
(C) Computer Saving Data to File. This field shows which computer will collect SuperTrend
data. If Local Computer appears, SuperTrend data is collected by the computer running PAC
Display Runtime. If the name of another computer appears, it is a remote computer that has been
previously selected. See Using SuperTrend Log Files on page 204 to learn how to choose this
remote computer.
195
195
Log to Database
Displays the Database Table dialog box that allows you to configure a table for logging
SuperTrend data. See Saving a SuperTrend to a Database on page 208.
(E) Color. Click here to enter the charts background color. In the Color dialog box that appears,
choose a color and click OK.
(F) Text File/Binary File. Select whether the historical log will be saved to a file in text or binary
format. When the SuperTrend data is saved in ASCII text format, the file includes a header that
contains information about tags assigned to the SuperTrend pens. When the data is saved in binary
format, the file does not include this header. Historical trend information saved in a binary file is
usually graphed more quickly than trend information that is saved in a text file.
If there are existing data files for a SuperTrend and the file format is switched between text and
binary, the Select Log File To Convert To dialog box will appear. In this dialog box, you can select a
log file to convert to the appropriate format. See on page 208 to learn more about switching
between text and binary file formats.
NOTE: When historical trending information from a text file is graphed, the chart will be drawn more slowly
than when using the same information from a binary file.
(G) Refresh Time. Select the refresh time here. You can choose from one of seven refresh time
groups. The scan rate appears in parentheses alongside the refresh group number. You can find out
more about refresh times in Scanning to Update Graphics on page 183. All tags associated with
the pens in this trend will be scanned at the same rate.
(H) Disable Scanning. Choose whether to disable a trend based on its windows state. If you
disable the trend, the tags associated with the pens wont be updated with new data from the PAC
Control strategy until the trend is enabled again. Disabling a trend saves the control engine
processing time by not having to respond to regular requests from PAC Display for tag updates.
The trend retains its recorded data at the time the trend was disabled.
196
A
B
C
D
(A) Time Span. Enter the time span (x-axis) the trend represents. Choose the time units from the
drop-down list. Your choices are seconds, minutes, hours, and days. The maximum time span is 49
days, or 1,176 hours.
(B) Major Divisions. Enter the number of major x-axis divisions for the trend. The trend will be
divided into this number of main sections. You can choose a color for the main section dividers in
Colors (D). The lines dividing the main sections will appear thicker than the lines dividing the minor
sections.
(C) Minor Divisions. Enter the number of minor x-axis divisions for the trend. The major sections
will be divided into this number of minor sections. The minimum number of divisions is one. You
can choose a color for the minor section dividers in Colors (D).
(D) Colors. Click on the boxes to set the colors for the major divisions, minor divisions, and labels.
In the Color dialog box that appears for each item, choose a color and click OK.
197
197
A
B
D
E
(A) Major Divisions (Grid). Enter the number of major y-axis divisions for the trend.
(B) Minor Divisions (Grid). Enter the number of minor y-axis divisions for the trend.
(C) Scale. Click here to select the scaling.
If you choose Default, the trend will always have the same fixed scale. You must enter values for
the Default Max. Value and Default Min. Value. These values specify the range of pen tag values.
This scaling is static and cannot be changed in Runtime.
If you choose Pen, the trend will have the scale of the active pen.
NOTE: To see all pens scaled the same in Runtime when using Pen scaling, see Using SuperTrends in
Runtime on page 334.
198
If you select the Logarithmic checkbox, the trend will have a logarithmic y-axis based on the
scale of the active pen. The logarithmic y-axis is determined by rounding down the minimum
pen value to the next lowest factor of ten, and rounding up the maximum pen value to the
next greatest factor of ten. For example, if a pens range has a minimum value of 500 and a
maximum value of 8500, the y-axis will have a minimum value of 100 and a maximum value of
10,000.
(D) Label Numeric Format. Click this button to open the Y-Axis Numeric Format dialog.
Fill in the options as you like for displaying the Y-axis labels. Y-axis values can be shown in decimal or
exponent form, or a mixture of both.
(E) Colors. Click on the boxes to set the colors for the major divisions, minor divisions, and labels in
the trend. If you want the y-axis to use the color of the pen thats currently active, select Active Pen
Color.
In the Color dialog box that appears for each item, choose a color and click OK.
199
199
A
B
C
(A) Time. Enter the amount of time to display on the trend while in zoom in/zoom out mode. Unit
choices, selected from the dropdown box, are seconds, minutes, hours, or days.
(B) Major Divisions. Enter the amount of time that constitutes one major division while in zoom
in/zoom out mode. Unit choices, selected from the dropdown box, are seconds, minutes, hours, or
days.
(C) Minor Divisions. Enter the number of minor divisions per major division while in zoom
in/zoom out mode. This number must be 1 or greater.
200
B
C
(A) Commands. This field displays the Runtime commands that may be associated with a hot
key. Highlight a command to configure a hot key for it, or to view the existing hot key settings.
(B) Modifiers. Check the box labeled Ctrl if you want the CTRL key to be part of the hot key. Check
the box labeled Shift if you wish the SHIFT key to be part of the hot key. You may select none, one, or
both.
(C) Key. This drop-down box lists all available keys that can be hot keys. Make sure that you do not
assign a hot key to more than one SuperTrend command.
201
201
A
B
C
D
E
(A) Pen #. Check this box to enable the pen in this row (uncheck the box to disable the pen). The
pen is enabled automatically when it is first created.
(B) Name. Once a pen is configured, its name appears here.
(C) Color. Click here to select the pen color. In the Color dialog box that appears, choose a color
and click OK.
(D) Modify. Click here to configure a pen or to modify its configuration. The SuperTrend Pen #
configuration dialog box appears. Configure the pen and click OK. The pen name will be listed in B.
202
A
B
D
E
C
F
G
H
I
J
K
(A) Name. Enter a SuperTrend pen name, if desired. By default, when a tag is selected in B, the
name will be the same as the tagname. In Runtime, this name is displayed in the SuperTrends Active
Pen drop-down list.
(B) Tag. Enter a PAC Control tagname here by clicking the Tag Selection button in C.
(C) Tag Selection Button. To enter a tagname in B, click here and select a tag in the Tag
Selection dialog box that appears. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about
selecting and configuring tags.
(D) Range. These fields configure the range of displayed data points:
The Max Value, or maximum value, is the tag value that will position the pen at the top of the
trend. If a scanned value of the tag is greater than the Max Value, the point will be plotted but
will not be visible on the trend.
When graphing integers, the Max Value must be a multiple of the y-axis major divisions,
otherwise there will be rounding errors. For example, if the y-axis major divisions is 7, the Max
Value might be 21 (3x7), 49 (7x7), or 84 (12x7). The y-axis major divisions is set on the Y-axis tab.
See Configuring Y-Axis Parameters on page 197.
The Min Value, or minimum value, is the tag value that will position the pen at the bottom of
the trend. If a scanned value of the tag is less than the Min Value, the point will be plotted but
will not be visible on the trend.
(E) Line. Click in the box next to Color to choose a pen color. In the Color dialog box that appears,
choose a color and click OK. Enter the width of the line you want created by the pen. The width is
specified in pixels.
(F) Point Marker Enabled. Click here to have point markers displayed for every scanned point.
Point markers make it easy to identify scanned data. In historical mode, you can click on a scanned
point to display its data (value, time scanned, etc.).
(G) Point Marker Size. Choose a point marker width, which is measured in pixels.
203
203
(H) Runtime Options. Select Cannot Disable to prevent the pen from being manually disabled
in Runtime.
(I) Deadband. If a SuperTrends Trend Type is set to Combined on the Setup tab of the
SuperTrend Setup dialog box, use Deadband to produce smaller, more manageable log files.
Without deadbanding, a combined SuperTrend writes point data to a log file even when the data
does not change. The resulting log file might contain many hundreds or even thousands of identical
entries.
No Deadband: Choose this option if you do not want deadbanding.
Enable Discrete Deadband: Logging only occurs when the specified discrete value toggles either a
tags on or off state, or the bit in an integer.
NOTE: Use Enable Discrete Deadband only for discrete values. PAC Display actually uses a value of 0.5 for
the deadband amount. If a floating point value is being trended, and Enable Discrete Deadband is
selected, unexpected results may occur.
Enable Value Deadband: Logging only occurs if the newly plotted point value exceeds the previous
point by greater than the value you have entered here. Only positive values are accepted.
(J) Force Logging. When deadbanding is enabled, use this option to force a log file entry to be
generated even if the value for the pen has not exceeded the specified deadband amount. This is
useful for logging values that rarely change more than the deadband amount, but you need
verification that logging occurred over a set time span.
Enter a positive whole number, and select either Minutes or Hours.
204
205
205
The illustration below shows the required settings to have the computer PC 1 save SuperTrend log
files. With these settings, computers PC 2 and PC 3all running the same PAC Display
projectwould display SuperTrend data on-screen, but would not save SuperTrend log files.
PC 1
PC 2
PC 3
206
2. Click Log To, and then select Log File from the pop-up menu.
The Historic Log File Configuration dialog box appears.
NOTE: Under File Name, only the Automatic option is available as the source, and no user-defined
names are allowed. PAC Display creates the log file name because when you view the log file in
Historical view mode, the log files are filtered based on their extension.
207
207
PAC Display project, which means that each computer will save SuperTrend log files in its
local project directory.
NOTE: If you have selected a remote computer to save SuperTrend log files, the Use Project
Directory option will not be available. You must click Browse and select a directory from
the list of network directories that appears, even if the directory you select is the same as
the project directory.
To save the log files for this SuperTrend in a location other than the PAC Display project
directory, do the steps below. If there are a lot of historic log files, saving each SuperTrends
log files to a different folder can speed up the display time.
When your project is running, SuperTrend log files will be saved in the remote directory
you specified. This setting will apply to each computer that is running this PAC Display
project; each computer will save SuperTrend log files in the remote directory you selected.
208
If there is a database configured, a dialog shows the default settings for the table that will be
created and logged to.
209
209
Press Yes to create a new table and start logging to that table.
Press No to rename the existing table and continue logging to that table.
210
Options to
choose the file
format of a
SuperTrend
historic log file
2. If Text File is selected, choose Binary File; if Binary File is selected, choose Text File.
The Select Log File to Convert to dialog appears. In the example below, text files that can be
converted to binary format appear in the list:
211
211
NOTE: This utility creates a separate, new file in text (or binary) format that is not used by PAC Display. The
format of the original SuperTrend historic log file is not changed. If you want to change the format in which
this original log file is saved, see Saving a Log in Text or Binary Format on page 210.
Do not rename or modify any original SuperTrend historic log files. These are files with
the file extension .Tnn (for example, .T00, .T02, etc.; the number depends on how many
SuperTrends are saving historic data).
If you rename the new files that are created by the utility, do not use the name or file
extension of the original SuperTrend historic log file.
If you convert a text file to binary format, the header information in the text file will be
removed. This information cannot be recovered, even if you convert the binary file back to
text format.
The current project folder is selected by default. To browse to a different folder, click the Browse
for Folder link. All SuperTrend files located in that folder are listed with either Text or Binary
shown as the type.
2. Check the box next to one or more file names, and then click Convert.
The files are converted to the correct format even if files of both types are selected.
Files are converted as follows:
212
Text to Binary: Each new binary file has has the same name as the original with .bin
appended to the end. For example, RD090319.T00 becomes RD090319.T00.bin.
Binary to Text: Each new text file has has the same name as the original with .txt appended
to the end. For example, RD090319.T00 becomes RD090319.T00.txt.
To use the command line version of the conversion utility:
Open a command prompt window, and at the command prompt enter:
STRNDCVT.EXE [log file]
where [log file] is the name of the SuperTrend historic log file to be converted. For example, to
convert a log file named RH021615.T00, you would enter:
STRNDCVT.EXE RH021615.T00
The format change occurs automatically: If the log file is in binary format, it will be converted to text;
the new text file has the extension .txt. If the file is in text format, it will be converted to binary; the
new binary file has the file extension .bin.
Using XY Plots
You can use XY plots to graph real-time tag information. XY plots do not graph data over time, but
instead plot points on a two-dimensional graph using data from two float or integer tables in the
PAC Control strategy. (See Opto 22 form 1700, the PAC Control Users Guide, for information on using
numeric tables in a strategy.)
The value in each element of the numeric tables defines the coordinates for a single point on the
x-axis and y-axis coordinate system. The example below shows how two numeric tables, each
having three elements, would be used to draw three consecutive points on an XY plot.
Table Element
Numeric_Table_1
Numeric_Table_2
XY Coordinates
(3,8)
5.25
10
(5.25,10)
3.3
(2,3.3)
An XY plot is useful in applications where one value must be graphed against another value.
Common examples in industrial settings include graphing temperature versus pressure,
displacement versus input, or voltage versus current.
In this section:
Creating an XY Plot on page 213
Modifying an XY Plot on page 214
Configuring Individual Plots in an Object on page 216
Creating an XY Plot
1. Select the XY Plot tool
from the toolbox and position the cursor where you want the XY
plot object to begin in the window.
2. Click the mouse button, drag the mouse to the desired size, and then release the mouse
button.
213
213
USING XY PLOTS
Y-Axis Layout
Label Position =
Bottom
Max. Val = 100
Min. Val = 0
Major Divisions = 5
Minor Divisions = 2
X-Axis Layout
Label Position = Left Major Divisions = 5
Min. Val = 0 Minor Divisions = 2
Max. Val = 100
Modifying an XY Plot
Choose the Select tool and double-click the XY plot.
The XY Plot Configuration dialog box appears.
A
B
D
E
C
F
G
J
K
H
I
L
M
214
The XY Plot Configuration dialog box is used to set the parameters of an XY plot graphic, including
the number of plotted lines that are displayed and the scaling used for the x-axis and y-axis.
(C) Allow Range Change in Runtime. Select the Allow Range Change in Runtime checkbox
to allow the user to change the x-axis and y-axis range values in PAC Display Runtime.
(D) Pens. Use the plot configuration buttons to define up to six individual plotted points in the XY
plot. Each individual plot uses x-axis and y-axis coordinates from two PAC Control tags. You can also
define the plotted points color and width, and specify line style and whether a legend should
appear. See Configuring Individual Plots in an Object on page 216 for more information.
(E) Pen Checkbox. Check this box to display a configured individual plot (uncheck the box to
hide the plot).
(F) X-Axis Number of Major Divisions. Enter the number of major x-axis divisions for the XY
plot. This is the number of main sections the graph is divided into. You can also choose a color for
the major divisions by clicking the Color field. In the Color dialog box that appears, choose a color
and click OK.
NOTE: For both x- and y-axis divisions, the lines dividing the major divisions appear thicker than the minor
divisions.
(G) X-Axis Number of Minor Divisions. Enter the number of minor x-axis divisions for the XY
plot. This will be the number of sections the major divisions are divided into. The minimum number
of divisions is one.
You can also choose a color for the minor x-axis divisions by clicking the Color field. In the Color
dialog box that appears, choose a color and click OK.
(H) X-Axis Min/Max Value. Enter the minimum and maximum values for the x-axis. In addition
to whole numbers and decimals, you can also use negative exponents for numbers less than 1. For
example, for the number .0000001, you would enter 1.00e-07.
(I) X-Axis Labels on Left/Right. Enter the label position for the x-axis. By default, the x-axis is
labeled on the left, but you can also choose to have the label on the right or on both sides.
(J) Y-Axis Number of Major Divisions. Enter the number of major y-axis divisions for the XY
plot. This is the number of main sections the graph is divided into. You can also choose a color for
the major divisions by clicking the Color field. In the Color dialog box that appears, choose a color
and click OK.
NOTE: For both x- and y-axis divisions, the lines dividing the major divisions appear thicker than the minor
divisions.
215
215
USING XY PLOTS
(K) Y-Axis Number of Minor Divisions. Enter the number of minor y-axis divisions for the XY
plot. This will be the number of sections the major divisions are divided into. The minimum number
of divisions is one.
You can also choose a color for the minor y-axis divisions by clicking the Color field. In the Color
dialog box that appears, choose a color and click OK.
(L) Y-Axis Min/Max Value. Enter the minimum and maximum values for the y-axis. In addition
to whole numbers and decimals, you can also use negative exponents for numbers less than 1. For
example, for the number .0000002, you would enter 2.00e-07.
(M) Y-Axis Labels on Top/Bottom. Enter the label position for the y-axis. By default, the y-axis
is labeled at the bottom, but you can also choose to have the label at the top, or at both top and
bottom.
(N) OK. Click OK to save your settings.
(A) X-Axis Table. Enter a PAC Control tagname here that will provide the x-axis values. Click the
Tag Selection Button (B) to open the Tag Selection dialog box.
(B) Tag Selection Dialog Button (X-Axis). To enter a tagname in A, click here. The Tag
Selection dialog box is displayed so you can select a tag for a numeric table. For the table you select,
also enter the starting index (usually 0) and the number of table elements to be used in the plot. The
216
fields for these values are shown in the illustration below. To learn more about configuring tags in
your project, see Configuring Tags on page 75.
For a selected numeric
table, enter a starting
index (usually 0) and the
number of table elements
to use (50 maximum).
(C) Y-Axis Table. (Same as the X-Axis Table setting (A) above, but sets the tag used for the y-axis.)
(D) Tag Selection Dialog Button (X-Axis). Same as the x-axis tag selection (B) above, but
selects the tag used for the y-axis.)
(E) Pen Color. Click here to choose a pen color. In the Color dialog box that appears, choose a
color and click OK.
(F) Pen Width. Enter the width of the line you want created by the pen. The width is specified in
pixels.
(G) Show Legend in Runtime. Select the Show Legend in Runtime checkbox to have the
names of the tags used appear under the graphs x-axis.
(H) Draw Connecting Lines. Select Draw Connecting lines to have lines connect each x-y
coordinate.
217
217
USING XY PLOTS
218
9: Configuring Trigger-Based
Events
Introduction
In this chapter, you will learn how to make different types of events occur based on the value of a
tag in a PAC Control strategy. These events include saving an historic data log, launching an
application, playing a sound, changing a windows state, downloading and uploading a recipe to
the control engine, and starting an alarm.
In This Chapter
What is a Trigger-Based Event? .......................... 219
Historic Data Logs..................................................... 220
Launching Applications......................................... 238
Sounds........................................................................... 243
Configuring Trigger-Based Window States... 244
219
219
Discretes
With integer tables and float tables, you can select individual elements, groups of elements, or all
elements in the table. See the PAC Control Users Guide for more information on working with tables
in a PAC Control strategy.
NOTE: To save data from more than one control engine, you must create a separate historic log file for each
control engine that will be monitored. Data from multiple control engines cannot be saved in the same
historic log file.
220
A
B
C
D
E
F
IMPORTANT: To save data from more than one control engine in a historic log file, you must create a
separate historic log file for each control engine that will be monitored. If data from multiple control
engines is saved in the same historic log file, it is difficult to extract and use the log data from each control
engine.
If there are no historic logs in the project, the Modify and Delete buttons cannot be selected.
Selecting a configured historic log enables the Modify, Delete, and Duplicate buttons.
(A) Add. Click Add to create a new historic data log in the Historic Log Configuration dialog box
that appears.
(B) Modify. Highlight an existing log and click Modify to change it in the Historic Log
Configuration dialog box that appears.
(C) Delete. Highlight an existing log and click Delete to remove it.
(D) Duplicate. Highlight an existing log and click Duplicate to create a copy of the log.
(E) Import. Click this button to display the following import options.
Import from Subfolder: Select one or more binary (.hle) files import into the current project.
Import from Comma Delimited File: Select one or more comma-delimited (.csv) files to
import into the current project.
(F) Export. Highlight one or more files you want to export, then click this button to display the
following options.
Export to Subfolder: Exports the selected historic logs in binary format to the current
projects Exported Historic Logs subfolder. Each file has the name of the historic log with the
.hle extension. For example: Pressures Log.hle
221
221
Export to Comma Delimited File: Exports the selected historic logs in binary format to the
current projects Exported Historic Logs subfolder. Each file has the name of the historic log
with the .csv extension (so it automatically opens in Excel).
For example: Water Log.csv
E
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
(A) Name. Enter the name of the historic log here. Use this name to refer to the historic log group
youre configuring. (This name does not affect the name of the historic log file that is saved to disk.)
NOTE: The name in this field must be different from all historic logs within the project or you will get an error
message when you exit the dialog box.
(B) ID. This field shows a unique numeric identifier for the historic log. This identifier, which starts
out at 00 and increases sequentially, is used as the last two characters of the three-character file
name extension for a historic log file. The first character of this file name extension is an uppercase
H, so with the identifier, a typical file name extension for a historic data log would be .H00
(C) Refresh Time. Select a previously configured refresh time group to scan the historic log point
tags. This scan rate applies to every log point configured within this historic log. For more
information on setting up refresh time groups, see Refresh Time Groups on page 184.
(D) Samples per Refresh Time. Enter the number of times per each Refresh Time unit that a
tag value is scanned. This does not change how often the historic data log is written to (the Refresh
Time), it only changes how often a tag value is scanned.
222
To calculate the actual time interval between each scan, divide the Refresh Time by the Samples per
Refresh Time. For example, if the Refresh Time scan rate is 1 second, a Samples per Refresh Time
value of 3 will sample the tag value every .333 seconds. If the Refresh Time scan rate is 2 seconds, a
value of 3 will sample the tag value every .666 seconds. To ensure that the freshest data is added to
the historic data log, enter an odd number greater than 1 and less than 10.
(F) Historic Log Points. This list shows all configured historic log points for this log file. The
order of the points in the list (top to bottom) is the order in which the points will be logged. To
change the order of the list, select a point, and then choose one of the Move buttons in J.
(G) Append. Click to add a historic log point to the end of the historic log point list (E). See
Configuring an Historic Log Point on page 233 for more information.
(H) Insert. Click to insert a historic log point above a highlighted historic log point.
(I) Modify. Lets you modify the highlighted historic log point.
(J) Delete. Deletes the highlighted historic log point from the list (E).
(K) Move Up/Down. Highlight the log point you want to move, and then click Move Up or Move
Down to change the position of the point in the historic log point list.
(L) Start Trigger. Using a start trigger is optional. Click to configure the PAC Control tag that will
start scanning the listed historic log points. Check the Enabled box to make the start trigger active.
See Configuring a Start or Stop Trigger on page 234 for more information.
Since the start trigger can be activated only from a non-triggered state, you must also configure a
stop trigger at L or a number of scan times at M.
(M) Stop Trigger. Click to configure the PAC Control tag that will stop scanning the listed historic
log points. Check the Enabled box to make the stop trigger active. A stop trigger is required only
when you have configured a start trigger. Additionally, a stop trigger is edge-sensitive and only
activates on a false-to-true state transition. See Configuring a Start or Stop Trigger on page 234 for
more information on setting up a stop trigger.
(N) Number of Samples. Another way to stop scanning the historic log points is to set the
number of samples, or times the points are scanned. Select Number of Samples, and then enter a
discrete number of samples to take once the start trigger occurs.
223
223
(O) Notification. Click this button to assign a value to a tag when historic log sampling has
stopped. Check the Enabled box to make notification active. See Notification When a Trigger Has
Stopped on page 235 for more information.
(P) OK. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
Now well look at the additional steps needed to complete the settings in the Historic Log
Configuration dialog box.
224
If there is a database configured, a dialog shows the default settings for the table that will be
created and logged to.
No matter what the point names are, they appear under the Point_Name column, and the
values appear under the Point_Value column. The Point_Value column is always a string
representation of the value. So if the point is a FLOAT (for example, temperature) the
Point_Value might show 78.4, but this is not a FLOAT. It is the literal string 78.4. Any queries
performed against this table will need to convert the string to a float (if needed).
225
225
NOTE: Column names must not conflict with the SQL reserved words for that database type. Some
examples are "value", "integer", etc.
Press Yes to create a new table and start logging to that table.
Press No to rename the existing table and continue logging to that table.
226
B
C
D
E
F
G
L
H
I
J
K
(A) Name. Choose the directory where the historic log file will be saved. Click Name and enter the
directory path in the field next to it, or click Browse to find a directory path. Click Use Project
Directory to save the historic log file to the PAC Display project directory. (This occurs by default if
you dont specify a location.)
(B) Source. Select Automatic, Fixed, or From strategy to determine how the historic log file name
will be created, and then fill in additional information as needed for that option.
If the Automatic option is used, historic log files are named based on the rules described in Naming
Historic Log Files and SuperTrend Files on page 236. If you select this option, files are named using
the rollover convention if required; this is described on page 237. If rollover is not used, the file is
named histlog.Hnn, where nn is the two-digit historic log ID number. The Automatic option is used
by default if you do not select another option.
(C) Fixed Name. If you selected the Fixed option in B, enter a file name here. The file name can
be any valid, eight-character DOS file name and doesnt require a three-character file extension.
Note that if you dont specify an extension, one is not added automatically.
You must configure and enable a Start Trigger for this type of file (see page 234). When the trigger
starts the historic data log, the new data is appended to the file if the file already exists. If the file
doesnt already exist, it is created. The rollover naming convention doesnt apply to this type of file
name.
(D) String Name. If you selected the From strategy string option, enter a PAC Control string
tagname here. Use the Tag Selection button
to quickly enter the tag containing the name of the
historic log file. You must configure and enable a Start Trigger for this type of file (see page 234).
227
227
When the trigger starts the historic log, the string containing the file name is read, and the new data
is appended to the log file if the file already exists. If the file doesnt already exist, it is created. The
rollover naming convention doesnt apply to this type of file name.
If the string name in D is an invalid file name, the default name of the log file is created using the
following rules:
If the string is empty, the project directory is added to the Default Name (E) and the extension
is an uppercase H followed by the historic log ID number.
If the string is not empty and a project directory is not specified as the directory path, the Name
in A is added to the Default Name (E).
If the project directory is specified as the path, or the previous step failed, the project directory
is added to the Default Name (E) and the extension is an uppercase H followed by the historic
log ID number. If the project directory is read-only or there is not enough room left on the drive
containing the project directory, an error message indicates the file could not be created.
(E) Default Name. Enter a default file name in E in case the file name in String Name (D) is
invalid. The file name can be any valid, eight-character DOS file name. The three-character file
extension is assigned by PAC Display, and will start with an uppercase H followed by the historic
logs ID (for example: .H00 if the ID is 00).
(F) Line Format. Click to configure the character, or delimiter, used to separate the data in the log
file, to choose the type of quotes used for each data line, and where to insert carriage returns. You
configure these parameters in the Line Format dialog box that appears. See page 236 for more
information.
(G) Lines Buffered. Enter the number of lines of data your PC will save to a memory buffer
before writing the information to the historic log file. When choosing a number, keep in mind that
the lower the number of buffered data lines, the more frequently the computer has to write to the
file. Alternately, the higher the number of data lines buffered in memory, the more data that will be
lost if your PC loses power or has a system failure. A valid entry is any number between 0 and 999;
the default is 20 lines.
(H) Number of Files to Retain. Enter the maximum number of historic log files that can be
created using rollover before the oldest file is overwritten. For example, if you enter 10 and your
rollover time period is set to hours, you will have 10 historic log files created for 10 hours of data
before the oldest file is overwritten with new data. See page 237 for more information on rollover
settings.
(I) Rollover. Choose the rollover time period here. Select None to have all logged data placed in a
single data file named HISTLOG.Hnn, where nn is the two-character identifier assigned to the
historic log. If you select Weeks, also select the day of the week to have the files rollover. Otherwise
the files will rollover on Thursday, the default. Logging begins when the PAC Display project is
loaded, and data collected will be appended to the existing data file. The size of the file is limited
only by available disk space.
To use the Trigger option, see Using the Rollover Trigger Option on page 233. Logging begins
when the Start Trigger is activated, and data collected will be appended to the existing data file. The
size of the file is limited only by available disk space. See Naming Files Using Rollover on page 237.
228
(J) Use 0.01 Sec Resolution. Select this option to log the time in hundredths of a second.
(K) Keep File Open. Select Keep file open to leave the log file open to allow data to be
appended to the historic log file more quickly. If you leave this box unchecked (the default setting),
the file is closed after each time data is written to it. This provides greater data integrity than leaving
the file open.
(L) OK. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
229
229
Each historic log is automatically exported in a separate file to the Exported Historic Logs
subfolder of the current project.
Comma-delimited files have the format:
<Name of Historic Log>.csv
Binary files have the format:
<Name of Historic Log>.hle
To import the alarm points into another project, see the next section, Importing Historic Logs.
An Import Historic Log dialog opens for you to navigate to the folder containing the file.
230
NOTE: If there are errors during the import, PAC Display displays a message indicating the error. The
import fails at the first error. PAC Display makes no attempt to guess what the intended field should
contain nor does it try to correct the error or present possible solutions. If an error is encountered, check
the contents of each field with the table below. The table details the possible values for the fields.
Tag Definition Format. The following table describes a single Tag definition in the
comma-delimited file. There are ten fields, all of which are required for tags that are configured.
If tags are not configured, only the first three fields may be blank. The remaining fields (4-10) must
have the default values indicated. See Tag Definition Format on page 267.
Notification Definition Format. This table describes the definition for the notifications.
There are a total of 13 fields per notification. See Notification Definition Format on page 268.
NOTE: If notifications are not configured for an alarm point, the seven required tag fields (fields 4-10 in the
previous table) are still required.
Exported CSV File Format. This table shows the format of an exported comma-delimited
(.csv) historic log file.
Field
Description
Values
Log Path
Rollover
Lines Buffered
# lines buffered
0=unchecked; 1=checked
Max Files
Delimiter
QuoteType
10
UseCREvery
1 = checked;
0 = not checked
11
Nth Element
12
Add Space
231
231
Field
Description
Values
13
0=false;
1=true
14
File Source
0=Automatic;
1=Fixed;
2=From Strategy
15
Fixed Name
16
Default if Bad
17
Weekday
0=Sunday;6=Saturday
18
Use .01
19-28
The following fields follow for each Historic Log Point configured:
1-10
Tag to be logged
11
Name
12
FloatResolution
13
reserved
LogFormat
14
11
Value
12
Condition
0: >
1: =
2: <
3: >=
4: <=
5: not=
13
SetupType
0=Discrete; 1=Value
14
DiscreteCond
0=On;1=Off
15
Enabled
0=no;1=yes
16
StopT
17
NumSamples
232
Field
Description
Values
1-13
Notification
1. To add or change an historic log point in the Historic Log Configuration dialog box, click
Append or Insert to add a point, or click Modify to change a point.
233
233
4. (Optional) If you picked a float tag type, enter a number in the Floating Point Resolution box to
specify how many places to the right of the decimal point are recorded for floating point
numbers.
5. (Optional) If you picked an Integer 64 tag type, select the format: Decimal, Hexadecimal, or
Binary.
6. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
234
See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more information about selecting tags.
Discrete. Select the Discrete option to specify an on/off trigger state for tags which have a discrete
basetype. Once Discrete is selected, choose one of the following options to define the desired
trigger state.
Current Value. Select the Value option to define the floating point or integer value written to the
specified tag. The specific value is defined using the Set/Offset options and the Value Out field.
Set: Select Set if you want the value used as a replacement for the tag's current value.
Offset: Select Offset if you want the value added to the tag's current value.
Value Out: Enter the floating point or integer value to be written to the specified tag.
235
235
2. In the Line Format dialog box, select from the choices in the Delimiter group a character
(delimiter) that will separate data in the log file. To use a delimiter thats not listed, choose
Other and enter the character you want to use. Select Include space after delimiter to put a
space after each delimiter.
3. From the choices in the drop-down list Quotes Around Strings, select the quotes that will
appear around each string in the log file.
4. To insert a carriage return after a certain number of data elements, select the check box
Carriage return every and enter the number of data elements.
The maximum number of elements that can be entered is 99,999. This option is intended for
historic logs with very long data lines which are read by programs that cannot handle long
data lines. The date and time information at the beginning of a data line are not counted as
data elements. See Data Log Elements below for more information about data elements in
log files.
236
where yy= year, mm= month, dd= day, hh= hour, pp= previous date*, and ## represents the
two-character historic log ID number.
*The previous date for a weekly rollover is the date of the most recent day the rollover is set for. For
example if the rollover is set to Monday, and the date of the previous Monday was May 14, 2010,
then pp= 14 and the file would be named RW060514.H##.
The rollover time period for historic log files can be based on months, weeks, days, or hours.
Hours. If hours are selected as the rollover period, a new data file is created at the top of every
hour. For example, if data logging were triggered at 8:30 a.m., the first data file would contain data
from 8:30 a.m. to 9:00 a.m. Thereafter, data files will contain one hours worth of data for every hour
thereafter, 9:00 a.m. to 10:00 a.m., 10:00 a.m. to 11:00 a.m., etc.
Days. If days are selected as the rollover period, a new data file is created every day at midnight. For
example, if data logging were triggered at 7:00 p.m. on the 5th, the first data file would contain data
from 7:00 p.m. to 12:00 a.m. on the 5th. Thereafter, data files will contain data from midnight the 5th
to midnight the 6th, midnight the 6th to midnight the 7th, etc.
Weeks. If weeks are selected as the rollover period, a new data file is created every week on the
selected day at midnight. For example, if data logging were started on a Wednesday, and the
rollover period is set for Monday, the first data file would contain data from Wednesday to the
following Sunday. Thereafter, the weekly data files will contain data from Monday to Sunday.
Months. If months are selected as the rollover period, a new data file is created on the first day of
every month at midnight. For example, if data logging started on January 27th, the first data file
would contain data from the 27th of January to the 31st of January. Thereafter, data files will contain
data from the 1st of February to the end of February, the 1st of March to the 31st of March, etc.
Header Line. The first line of the file, a header line shows the name of each data field. Lines of
data samples then follow the header line.
237
237
LAUNCHING APPLICATIONS
Heres an example:
Date,Time,CNTR1:Float.TEMP208,CNTR1:Float.PRES209,CNTR1:Float.LEVEL218
Date and Time show where timestamp information will appear in the data lines.
CNTR1:TEMP208, CNTR1:PRES209, and CNTR1:LEVEL218 show that information will be
recorded for three PAC Control tags: TEMP208, PRES209, and LEVEL218. These tags are all on the
control engine named CNTR1.
Data Lines . Data lines follow a header line, and have the following format:
Date<delimiter>Time<delimiter>TAG1<delimiter>TAG2. . .TAG1000<crlf>
Date is the current system date with the format: YYYY/MM/DD, where YYYY=year, MM=month,
DD=day.
Time is the current system time with the format: hh:mm:ss, where hh=hour, mm=minute,
ss=seconds.
TAG1...TAG1000 are valid PAC Control tags with the format: control engine_Name:Item_Type.Tag.
<delimiter> is any printable ASCII character.
<crlf> is a carriage return, line feed.
Heres an example of what the file may look like:
Date,Time,Cookie:Float.TEMP208,Cookie:Float.PRES209,Cookie:Float.LEVEL218
2010/03/01,17:00:00,120.02,14.96,12.09
2010/03/01,18:00:00,120.06,14.98,12.03
2010/03/01,19:00:00,120.03,14.99,12.02
2010/03/01, 20:00:00,120.04,15.01,12.05
In this sample file, data is being sampled every hour from a control engine named Cookie, and a
temperature (TEMP208), pressure (PRES209), and tank level (LEVEL218) are being recorded.
Launching Applications
You can use PAC Display to start, or launch, other applications in two ways:
By configuring a dynamic attribute for a graphic, and then selecting the graphic during
Runtime. See 7: Using Animated Graphics on page 139 to learn how to do this in PAC Display
Configurator.
> Applications, and in the Application Managers dialog box that appears do the following:
238
To create a new application manager, click Add. You can configure up to 1,000 application
managers per project.
If you are creating or changing an application manager, the Application Manager Dialog Box will
open (see below).
In this section:
Application Manager Dialog Box (below)
Selecting a Working Directory for a Launched Application on page 240
Selecting the Application File to Run on page 241
Selecting a Trigger to Launch an Application on page 241
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
(A) Name. Enter the name of the application manager here. This name refers to this application
launch setup, and must be different from all application managers within the project.
(B) Working Directory. Enter the path name of the working directory to use after launching the
application. If a working directory isnt specified, the current project directory is used. Click Browse to
quickly choose a directory path in the Working Directory Selection dialog box (see page 240).
(C) Command Line. Enter the path and file name of the program you want to run when the
trigger condition occurs. Click Browse to quickly choose the path and file name in the standard
Windows file selection dialog box.
(D) Append String. (Optional) Select a string tag from the PAC Control strategy to be appended
to the Command Line string in C. If the appended string is a command line option, a space must be
included in the Command Line string to separate it from the main command line.
Use the Tag Selection button
to select the string tag name. See Configuring Tags on page 75
for more information on tags. Click the Clear button
to quickly remove an entry from D.
239
239
LAUNCHING APPLICATIONS
(E) Launch Options. Select Single instance to have PAC Display Runtime check whether the
trigger has already launched a session, or instance, of an application. If the trigger hasnt already
launched the application, it will be started. Select Multiple instances to let the trigger start any
number of sessions of the same application.
The Single Instance option doesnt prevent an application from being launched by other graphics
and triggers, so multiple instances of an application can still occur. For example, if a trigger launches
a Microsoft Word session, it cant launch any other application until this Word session ends. A
toggled graphic or another trigger, however, could launch another session of Word, so two
instances of the same application would be running concurrently.
CAUTION: Running multiple instances of the same application on your PC is not recommended. Just like
running several different applications at the same time, running multiple instances of the same
application requires additional memory and other system resources. This may slow your PCs performance,
as well as that of PAC Display Runtime.
(F) Show Options. Select how the applications window will appear on-screen: Normal,
Minimized, or Maximized.
(G) Trigger. Click Trigger to select the PAC Control tag used to trigger the application launch. The
trigger is edge-sensitive and only activates from a non-triggered state. See Selecting a Trigger to
Launch an Application on page 241 for more information.
(H) Notification. Click Notification to assign a value to a tag when an application is successfully
launched. See Notification When an Application Has Been Launched on page 242 for more
information. A check mark in the Notification enabled box indicates a notification tag is configured.
(I) OK. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
Now well look at the additional steps needed to complete the settings in the Application Manager
dialog box.
240
241
241
LAUNCHING APPLICATIONS
2. Enter the name of the trigger in the Name field. Use the Tag Selection button
to quickly
choose a tag from the Tag Selection dialog box.
3. Select Discrete or Current value in the Setup by group.
Discrete makes the tags on or off state trigger the application. Current Value sets the tag value
that will trigger the application. To enter a value in the Current Value field, select an operator in
the drop-down menu, and then enter a value to compare the tag to.
242
Sounds
Sounds can provide important feedback, such as alerts or warnings, for the operator using your PAC
Display project. You can add sounds to your PAC Display project by configuring triggers to start and
stop standard Windows sound files. To use this capability, the PC running the project must have a
properly configured sound card and corresponding system software, as well as a set of speakers. You
can use both digitized sound (.WAV) and MIDI music (.MID) files in your project.
Sounds can also be used with project alarms. See page 291 for more information.
In this section:
Configuring a Sound (below)
Configuring Start and Stop Triggers for Sounds on page 244
Configuring a Sound
To configure a sound, choose Configure > Sounds. The Sounds dialog box that appears lists all of
the sound events that are configured for the current PAC Display project.
Click Add to add a new sound event. You can configure up to 1,000 sound events per project.
NOTE: If there are no sound events in the project, the Modify and Delete buttons cannot be selected.
If you are creating or changing a sound event, the Sound Configuration dialog box will appear.
A
B
C
D
E
F
(A) Name. Enter a name for the sound event. No two sound events in a project may have the
same name.
(B) Sound File. Click Browse and select the sound file you want to play in the standard Windows
file selection dialog box that appears. If the Use project directory option is checked, you can only
choose sound files located in your project directory.
243
243
(C) Start Trigger. Click Start Trigger to configure a trigger to start playing the sound. See
Configuring Start and Stop Triggers for Sounds below to learn how to configure this trigger.
(D) Play Sound. Select the Play sound option if you want the sound to play a specific number of
times before stopping. Enter the number of times the sound will play in the field next to the option.
The default value is one.
(E) Stop Trigger. Click Stop Trigger to configure a trigger to stop the sound that is playing. See
Configuring Start and Stop Triggers for Sounds below to learn how to configure this trigger.
(F) OK. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
244
Click Add to add a new window manager. You can configure up to 1,000 window managers
per project.
If you are creating or changing a window manager, the Window Manager Configuration dialog box
will appear.
NOTE: If there are no window manager events in the project, the Modify and Delete buttons cannot be
selected.
245
245
RECIPES
a value to compare the tag to. Discrete makes the tags on or off state trigger the change in
window state.
Recipes
Recipes are ASCII text files used to download data to a control engine and to upload data back to a
PC running PAC Display. Recipes are very useful for batch processes where system variables are
pre-determined and vary between runs or product types. You can also use recipes to save critical
process settings and then create more recipes, or to restore a system after a failure.
Recipe download files are used to send process data and chart control instructions to a control
engine. Recipe upload files record values currently being used in table elements on a particular
table.
In this section:
Creating a Recipe Download File
Creating a Recipe Upload Template on page 248
Validating the Format of a Recipe File on page 251
Basic Recipe File Format on page 252
Recipe Download File Format on page 253
Recipe Upload File Format on page 255
Activating Recipe Downloads and Uploads on page 256
Configuring a Recipe Download on page 256
Configuring a Recipe Upload on page 257
246
The Index column lists all the available indices for the currently selected table.
NOTE: Using the Create Recipe Dialog you can only enter one set of indices for each table in a recipe
file. If you want to enter another set of indices for the table later in the recipe you must use a text editor.
5. Enter values using the following guidelines. PAC Display automatically limits the index value to
the maximum configurable index for the selected table.
Float Table: Use numeric data only. Spaces, commas or other non-numeric characters are
not accepted. A decimal point is not required.
247
247
RECIPES
Integer Table: Decimal points are not accepted. Spaces, commas or other non-numeric
characters are not accepted.
String Table: You may use any character except square brackets ([ and ]) which are reserved
for marking table indexes and cannot be included in strings. To enter a single string for one
index, click in the Value field next to the index number and enter the string.
Float, Integer, and Float Tables: To enter the same value for more than one index, select
multiple items using the either the SHIFT key or the CTRL key, then click Configure Multiple.
In the dialog box that opens, enter the value and a comment (if any), and click OK.
NOTE: If you enter invalid data, the data is cleared.
6. In the Charts area, select a chart, and then click the Add button
7. In the dialog that opens, select a chart action and then click OK.
The action is added to the recipe file and the dialog box closes.
8. To add an individual integer, float, or string tag, click Choose Variable Type, and then select a
type from the pop-up menu.
9. Click the down-arrow below Choose Variable Type and select a variable.
10. Click the Add button
box.
11. Enter a value and a comment (if desired), and then click OK.
12. If you need to remove the last entry, click Undo. Clicking Undo again removes the next to last
entries, and so on. The Redo button restores entries in the same order they were removed.
13. Click OK to close the Create Recipe File dialog box and confirm the configuration.
The Save As dialog box opens.
14. Select the filename and extension for the file.
If you want to use an extension other than .RCP or .TXT, place quotation marks around the
filename (e.g., My Recipe File.myExt).
15. Click OK, and then click OK again.
248
5. To select or de-select an individual index, click the square next to the Index number. The Select
All button selects all table indices. The Clear All button de-selects them.
249
249
RECIPES
6. To add a comment, select an index, click in the comment field, and type the comment.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box.
The recipe file will now look similar to the following:
8. If you need to remove the last entries, click Undo. Clicking Undo again removes the next to last
entries, and so on. The Redo button restores entries in the same order they were removed.
9. To add an individual integer, float, or string tag, click Choose Variable Type, and then select a
type from the pop-up menu.
10. Click the down-arrow and select a variable.
11. Click the Add button
variable.
250
next to the variable you just selected to add a comment about the
The Enter Value field is disabled for uploads because the value will be obtained from the
control engine.
12. Click OK to close the Create Recipe File dialog box and confirm the configuration.
The Save As dialog box opens.
13. Select the filename and extension for the file.
If you want to use an extension other than .RCP or .TXT, place quotation marks around the
filename (e.g., My Recipe File.myExt).
14. Click OK, and then click OK again.
2. Browse to the file, select the file type, then click OK.
The Edit Recipe File dialog box appears.
3. To edit the file, see the instructions for either Creating a Recipe Download File on page 246 or
Creating a Recipe Upload Template on page 248.
251
251
RECIPES
Is the referenced control engine part of the current PAC Display project?
Are the available types correctly spelled (e.g., Integer Table, Integer 64 Table, Float Table,
String Table or Chart)?
NOTE: This utility does not test whether the values entered for a table in a download file actually match the
table type specified.
To validate a recipe file:
1. Choose Tools > Validate Recipe File.
The validation dialog box opens.
5. If there are any errors, click Edit Recipe File to open a text editor and make the corrections. Save
the file, and then use the Re-test button to check the file again.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box.
252
page 255. To create a new recipe file, see Creating a Recipe Download File on page 246 or
Creating a Recipe Upload Template on page 248.
A recipe text file contains one or more PAC Control integer, float, or string table tags and values. You
can create or modify a recipe file using any text editor or word processor that can save files in ASCII
format.
As shown in the example, each recipe file contains at least one PAC Control table tag followed by
data values and blank lines. Recipes may also contain comments, and a download recipe might
include chart control instructions as well.
Comment
PAC Control
table tag
Table element
values
Blank lines
(two carriage
returns)
Comment LineAny line that starts with a / (forward slash) is a comment, and is ignored by PAC
Display. Use comments to explain the recipe and to make notes.
PAC Control TagIdentifies the table tag in the PAC Control strategy that the recipe uses. Only
integer, float, and string tags are valid tag types. The tag is in the following format:
<Control Engine Name>:<Type>.<Name>
<Type> includes one of the following keywords: Integer Table, Integer 64 Table, Integer, Float
Table,Float, String, or String Table. They identify the variable type and are separated from
<Control Engine Name> by a colon (:).
<Name> is the PAC Control table tag name. It must be of the type specified by <Type>. A
period (.) separates it from <Table Type>.
Element valuesThese are the values downloaded to the control engine or uploaded to the PC.
Blank lineThis is a required element of a recipe file. Make sure to create a blank line at the end of
a data list and at the end of the file by entering two carriage returns.
253
253
RECIPES
A download file provides an efficient method for making changes to program variables without
having to manually enter the data. For example, lets say you have a cookie factory that makes
chocolate chip cookies in the morning and peanut butter cookies in the afternoon. After making the
chocolate chip cookies you can download a recipe to the control engine that contains new values
for the peanut butter cookies.
This example has four table elements, one chart control instruction, and one single variable:
Table
elements
Single variable
Chart control
instruction
A
B
C
D
254
Chart identifies the keyword identifying this line as a chart instruction. Chart is separated
from <Control Engine Name> by a colon (:).
<Chart Name> is the PAC Control strategy chart name, and is separated from Chart by a
period (.).
<Chart State> is the chart instruction, and must include one of the following keywords: STOP,
SUSPEND, START, and CONTINUE. This instruction must be on the line following the <Chart
Name>. The last line in a chart control instruction must be a blank line and contain only a
carriage return.
Table element
indexes
255
255
RECIPES
As shown in the example, you can include table element indexes for multiple tables. Remember to
put a blank line before each new section of data and at the end of the file by entering two carriage
returns at the end of the line.
Chart control
instructions
My_Controller:Float Table.My_Float_Table
0: 1.234
1: 100.567
Cookie_Controller:Chart.My_Chart
RUN
/End of download recipe file
TriggerBy configuring a trigger that associates a tag with a recipe actionwhen the tag
value meets a defined value, the recipe action will be triggered. We will cover this method of
starting a recipe action in the next two sections, Configuring a Recipe Download and
Configuring a Recipe Upload on page 257.
256
If you are creating or changing a download recipe manager, the Download Recipe Manager dialog
box appears.
A
B
C
E
F
L
M
N
For descriptions of the items on this dialog box, please see Upload Recipe Manager Dialog Box on
page 258.
If you are creating or changing an upload recipe manager, the Upload Recipe Manager dialog box
appears.
257
257
RECIPES
A
B
C
E
F
G
I
J
K
L
M
N
(A) Name. Enter the name of the upload recipe manager. This name is used to refer to the recipe
group youre configuring in the Configurator. The name in this field must be different from all recipe
managers in this project.
(B) Format File Directory. Choose the directory the recipe file resides in. You can type the
directory in the edit box or click Browse to quickly find and enter the path.
(C) Make Path Relative to Project. When selected, if you copy the project and recipe files to a
different computer, PAC Display will look in the same relative location to find the recipe files in
Configurator and Runtime.
(D) File Name. Choose the source of the recipe file name.
If you choose Prompt for name, the operator will be asked for the name of the recipe file to be
uploaded.
(E) Fixed Name. If Fixed name was selected in C, enter the name of the recipe file located in
directory B. Notice the file extension is .rcp.
258
(F) String Name. If From strategy was selected in C, click the Tag Selection button
to enter a
tagname of type string that contains the recipe file name. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for
more information about using tags.
(G) Destination File Directory. Click Browse and choose the directory location of the recipe
file that will receive the information.
(H) File Name. Choose the source of the recipe file name.
If you choose Prompt for name, the operator will be asked for the name of the recipe file to be
uploaded to.
(I) Fixed Name. If Fixed name was selected in D, enter the name of the recipe file located in
directory B.
(J) Extension. Specify the file extension for the recipe files available to this dynamic attribute by
entering the extension in the File Extension field. The extension must be one to three characters
long and must not contain a period or DOS wild card characters.
If Fixed Name is checked, this extension will append to the File Name entry to create the name for
the recipe file. If Prompt For Name is checked, this extension will be used as a filter to select the files
for display in a file selection dialog box when Runtime executes this dynamic attribute. However,
you may override this filter if you wish to select a file with a different extension.
(K) String Name. If From strategy was selected in C, click the Tag Selection button
to enter a
tagname of type string that contains the recipe file name. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for
more information about using tags.
(L) Trigger (Trigger-based recipe upload ). Click Trigger to select a PAC Control tagname
that will trigger the upload recipe action. The trigger can be activated only from a non-triggered
state. See Selecting a Trigger to Start the Recipe Upload/Download on page 260 to learn how to
configure this trigger. Pressing the Trigger button displays the Recipe Trigger Configuration dialog
box.
(N) OK. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
Now well look at the additional steps needed to complete the settings in the Download/Upload
Recipe Manager dialog boxes.
259
259
RECIPES
You will need to do this when you choose the directory for the download recipe file, the upload
format file, or the destination upload file. Since all three options show very similar dialog boxes,
we will only discuss one of them.
3. In the Select Format File Directory dialog box that opens, navigate to the working directory
path and click OK. (Click Network to select a network drive.)
2. Enter the name of the trigger in the Name field. Use the Tag Selection button
to quickly
choose a tag from the Tag Selection dialog box. See Configuring Tags on page 75 for more
information about tags.
3. Select Discrete or Current value in the Setup by group. Current value sets the tag value that will
trigger the recipe download/upload. Select an operator in the drop-down menu, and then
enter a value to compare the tag to. Discrete makes the tags on or off state trigger the
application.
260
261
261
graphic.) You can easily generate a report that lists all the alarm points for a project; see Viewing
Tags and Dynamic Attributes on page 182 for more information.
Click Import to import alarm points from a comma-delimited file. Or, click Export to export
alarm points to a comma-delimited file. See, Importing Alarm Points on page 267.
If you are creating or changing an alarm point, the Alarm Point dialog box appears.
262
A
B
D
F
G
H
I
J
L
M
(A) Name. Enter a name for the alarm point here. The name of each alarm point in a project must
be unique and must be less than 128 characters. The PAC Control tag name appears by default.
(B) Tag. Displays the name of the PAC Control tag that you select with the Tag Selection button.
(C) Tag Selection Button. Click the Tag Selection button to select a PAC Control tag for the
alarm point. Note that the choice of tags available is determined by the type of tag you select in
Setup By (E).
(D) Hysteresis. Enter a hysteresis value that is applied to the tag value of a triggered alarm point
as it moves toward the Normal alarm value. The alarm point will remain in the triggered state until it
reaches its threshold value plus the hysteresis value (if the alarm point is below Normal) or minus
the hysteresis value (if the alarm point is above Normal).
For example, for a triggered HiHi alarm point, suppose the threshold value is 50, the hysteresis value
is 5, and the current triggered alarm point value is 53. If the next tag read has a value of 49 (that is, it
has descended past the configured threshold of 50), the alarm point will still remain in the triggered
HiHi state until the tag reading is less than 45.
(E) Setup By. Select the type of tag to be linked to the alarm point.
Choose Discrete for discrete tags, such as a digital input. Selecting this option enables the
Discrete page in the Alarm Point dialog box. See Entering Discrete Alarm Conditions on
page 274 for configuration information.
263
263
Choose Value for analog points, floats, or similar values. Selecting this option enables the Value
page in the Alarm Point dialog box. See Entering Alarm Values on page 276 for configuration
information.
Choose Control Engine Status to link the status of a control engine to the alarm point. The
alarm will be triggered whenever the linked control engine is not in Attached state. See
Setting Control Engine Status Alarm Points on page 278 for configuration information.
(F) Alarm. Click here to display the Alarm Notification dialog box, where you can have a specified
value written to a selected tag when the alarm point enters an alarm condition. See Alarm,
Acknowledge, and Alarm Clear Notifications below for information on setting up alarm
notification.
Select Enabled to make Alarm Notification active. (You cant select Enabled until Alarm Notification
is configured.)
(G) Alarm Clear. Click here to display the Alarm Clear Notification dialog box. Use this dialog box
to have a tag value be set or cleared when the current alarm returns to Normal from an alarmed
state. See Alarm, Acknowledge, and Alarm Clear Notifications below for information on setting up
alarm notification.
Select Enabled to make Alarm Clear Notification active. (You cant select Enabled until Alarm Clear is
configured.)
(H) Display Dialog When Alarmed. Check this box to display the alarm dialog when the
alarm point goes into an alarmed state in Runtime. This checkbox defaults to the current Display
Message Box for New Alarm Points setting in the Alarming Setup dialog. See Alarm Runtime and
User Options on page 283 to adjust this setting globally.
NOTE: Setting or clearing the Display Message Box for New Alarm Points setting in the Alarming Setup
dialog will set or clear this option for all alarm points. Therefore, it is highly recommended to set this global
default first, and then adjust the setting on a per-alarm point basis.
(I) Show Warning State. Check this option to enable this alarm point to display in the alarm
graphic when this point enters the warning state.
An alarm point is considered to be in a warning state when in one or both of the following
conditions:
a. A persistence time has been configured for the alarm point (see Entering Discrete Alarm
Conditions on page 274 and Entering Alarm Values on page 276 and the alarm has been
triggered, but is waiting for the persistence time to expire.
b. An alarm point has the Re-Alarm Time option configured and is still in the triggered state after
being acknowledged. To see the Re-Alarm option, select Configure > Alarm Points. Then click the
Add or Modify button, click the Discrete or Value tab (depending on the alarm type), and click one of
the More buttons.
See also Alarm Runtime and User Options on page 283.
(J) Acknowledge. Click here to display the Acknowledge Notification dialog box, where you can
have a specified value written to a selected tag when the alarm point is acknowledged by the
operator. See Alarm, Acknowledge, and Alarm Clear Notifications below for information on setting
up acknowledge notification.
264
Select Enabled to make Acknowledge Notification active. (You cant select Enabled until
Acknowledge Notification is configured.)
(K) Enable. Choose Condition to make the alarm point dependent on the value of another tag.
Click the Modify button (J) to select the tag and define the conditions it needs to meet.
Select Always Enabled for the alarm point not to be dependent on the value of another PAC Control
tag.
(L) Modify. If youve selected Condition under Enable (I) to make the alarm point dependent on
the value of another tag, click Modify and configure the tag and conditions in the Alarm Point
Conditional Enabling Setup dialog box that appears. See Setting Conditional Alarm Points on
page 273 for configuration information.
(M) Sound Options. Click the Browse button to select a sound file in a specific folder. Make sure
Play Sound When Alarmed is selected. Otherwise, the sound will not play when the point is in an
alarmed state.
Click the Clear button to remove the sound file.
See also, Configuring a Sound on page 243.
NOTES: If no sound file is configured, and the Play Sound When Alarmed checkbox is selected (the default),
then the global sound file will be used. If no global sound file has been configured a message appears
warning you that no sound will play when this alarm point is in an alarmed state unless you select a sound
file either for the alarm point or for the global sound. The global sound file is configured in the Configure >
Alarming Setup dialog on the Sound tab.
If you do not select a sound file for this alarm point and no global sound file is specified on the Sound tab
of the Configure > Alarming Setup dialog box, you cannot enable this option and an error message will
appear if you try.
If an alarm point has been configured to play the global sound file, but then the global sound file is cleared
in the Sound tab of the Configure > Alarming Setup dialog box, a message will warn you that no sound
will play when an alarm point is in an alarmed state unless you configure a default sound or change the
sound options for the alarm points.
(N) OK. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
Now well look at the additional steps needed to complete the settings in the Setup, Discrete, and
Value pages of the Alarm Point dialog box.
265
265
If you select Export to Subfolder (for a binary file), a message confirms success.
Each alarm point is automatically exported in a separate file to the Exported AlarmPoints
subfolder of the current project. These binary files have the format:
<Name of Alarm Point>.ape
Readable text files are also created that provide details for each exported alarm point.
If you select Export to Comma-Delimited File, the Export Alarm Points dialog box opens.
Select the target directory, name the file, and click Save. These files have the format:
<Name you assign>.adl
NOTE: If you select the same file again later, you will have the option of overwriting the existing file. If
you select No, the alarm points are appended to the selected file.
If there are errors, the message displays up to 10 alarm points in an error list.
To import the alarm points into another project, see the next section, Importing Alarm Points.
266
For a binary file, an Import Alarm Point dialog opens showing exported alarm point files in the
Exported Alarm Points subfolder under the current project.
For a comma-delimited file, navigate to the folder containing the file.
4. For a binary file, select one or more alarm point files (.ape) to import. Or, for a comma-delimited
file, select the single file (.adl) to import.
5. Click Open. The alarm points are imported and added to the list.
6. Click OK to confirm.
NOTE: If there are errors during the import, PAC Display displays a message indicating the error. The
import fails at the first error. PAC Display makes no attempt to guess what the intended field should
contain nor does it try to correct the error or present possible solutions. If an error is encountered, check
the contents of each field with the table below. The table details the possible values for the 160 fields
of each alarm point.
Tag Definition Format. The following table describes a single Tag definition in the
comma-delimited file. There are ten fields, all of which are required for tags that are configured.
If tags are not configured (i.e., no alarm point notifications, conditional tag, HiHi tag, etc.), only the
first three fields may be blank. The remaining fields (4-10) must have the default values indicated.
267
267
Field
Description
Values
Item Name
Field Type
Element Index
Bit Index
Start Index
Number of Elements
Refresh Group
Reserved1
10
Reserved2
Notification Definition Format. This table describes the definition for the notifications
(Alarm, Acknowledge, and Clear) used in describing an alarm point. There are a total of 13 fields per
notification.
NOTE: If notifications are not configured for an alarm point, the seven required tag fields (fields 4-10 in the
previous table) are still required.
Field
1-10
Description
Values
Tag Description
11
Send Type
12
Send Value
13
Enabled Flag
Alarm Point Definition Format. The entire alarm point definition file is described below.
Field
1
2-11
268
Description
Values
Required
Yes
Yes
Field
Description
Values
Required
12
Deadband
Yes
13
Setup Type
Yes
14-26
Acknowledge Notification
No*
27-39
Alarm Notification
No*
40-52
Clear Notification
No*
53
0 if No, 1 if Yes
Yes
54
0 if No, 1 if Yes
Yes
55
Always Enabled?
0 if No, 1 if Yes
Yes
Conditional Tag
No**
66
Yes
67
0 or value used
No
68
No
69
Yes
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
RESERVED
MUST BE 0
78
56-65
No
No
269
269
Field
Values
Required
79
RESERVED
MUST BE 0
80
HiHi Enabled?
0 = No (default); 1 = Yes
81
HiHi Value
82
HiHi Priority
83
0 if FALSE 1 if TRUE
Yes
HiHi Tag
No**
94
HiHi Comment
No
95
0 = No or if Not Used;
1 = True
96
97
RESERVED
MUST BE 0
98
99
RESERVED
MUST BE 0
100
Hi Enabled?
0 = No (default); 1 = Yes
101
Hi Value
102
Hi Priority
103
Hi - Use Tag?
0 if FALSE 1 if TRUE
Yes
Hi Tag
No**
114
Hi Comment
No
115
Hi Runtime Adjustable?
0 = No or if Not Used;
1 = True
116
117
RESERVED
MUST BE 0
118
119
RESERVED
MUST BE 0
84-93
104-113
270
Description
Field
Description
Values
Required
120
Normal Enabled?
0 = No or if Not Used;
1 = Yes
121
Normal Priority
122
Normal Comment
123
Lo Enabled?
0 = No (default); 1 = Yes
124
Lo Value
125
Lo Priority
126
Lo Use Tag?
0 if FALSE 1 if TRUE
Yes
Lo Tag
No**
137
Lo Comment
138
Lo Runtime Adjustable?
0 = No or if Not Used;
1 = True
139
140
RESERVED
MUST BE 0
141
142
RESERVED
MUST BE 0
143
LoLo Enabled?
0 = No (default); 1 = Yes
144
LoLo Value
145
LoLo Priority
146
0 if FALSE 1 if TRUE
Yes
LoLo Tag
No**
157
LoLo Comment
No
158
0 = No or if Not Used;
1 = True
159
160
RESERVED
MUST BE 0
161
127-136
147-156
No
No
271
271
Field
Description
Values
Required
Yes, even if not a
Value alarm point
162
RESERVED
MUST BE 0
163
No
164
Yes
165
Yes
* Even if no notifications are configured there are required fields. See Notification Definition Format on page 268.
** Even if the tag is not configured, there are required fields. See Tag Definition Format on page 267.
An alarm occurs
To configure an alarm point for these events, click Alarm, Alarm Clear, or Acknowledge in the Alarm
Point dialog box.
The Alarm Notification, Alarm Clear, or Acknowledge Notification dialog box appears. These dialog
boxes are identical. (The Alarm Notification dialog box is shown below.)
272
273
273
274
1. To select the state of the alarm condition tag, select True/On to have the alarm point be in the
alarm state when the associated tag is on for discretes, or true for integer bits. Select
False/Off to have the alarm point be in the alarm state when the associated tag is off for
discretes or false for integer bits.
2. Select the check box next to Normal to have the normal state displayed in history windows and
logs. The normal state is the opposite of the alarm state.
3. When an alarm point state occurs, you can define how long it must be in that state (the
persistence time) before the alarm point is triggered. Click More and enter the Persistence Time
in milliseconds or seconds.
4. When an alarm point state remains after the alarm has been triggered and acknowledged, you
can define how much time must elapse before the alarm point is re-triggered. Click More and
enter the Re-Alarm Time in milliseconds or seconds.
275
275
5. Enter an integer value between 0 and 999 in the Priority fields to define an alarm value for each
alarm level. The highest priority is represented by 999, and 0 represents the lowest. Priority
values can be useful in Runtime for displaying the relative importance of alarm points, and for
filtering out alarms with lower priorities.
6. (Optional) In the Comment fields, enter text that will be displayed in alarm graphics for each
alarm level. The comment can have a maximum of 256 characters. This comment can display
information about the alarm point, for example, or provide instructions to the operator.
7. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
You must define values for each alarm level that will be used with the alarm point. The following
alarm levels are available:
276
HiHi alarms occur when the tag value is greater than or equal to the HiHi value.
Hi alarms occur when the tag value is greater than or equal to the Hi value and less than the
HiHi value.
Lo alarms occur when the tag value is less than or equal to the Lo value and greater than the
LoLo value.
LoLo alarms occur when the tag value is less than or equal to the LoLo level.
For each alarm level you want to use with the alarm point, do the following:
You must define values for each alarm level that will be used with the alarm point. The following
alarm levels are available:
HiHi alarms occur when the tag value is greater than or equal to the HiHi value.
Hi alarms occur when the tag value is greater than or equal to the Hi value and less than the
HiHi value.
Lo alarms occur when the tag value is less than or equal to the Lo value and greater than the
LoLo value.
LoLo alarms occur when the tag value is less than or equal to the LoLo level.
For each alarm level you want to use with the alarm point, do the following:
1. To select the state of the alarm condition tag, select True/On to have the alarm point be in the
alarm state when the associated tag is on for discretes, or true for integer bits. Select
False/Off to have the alarm point be in the alarm state when the associated tag is off for
discretes or false for integer bits.
2. Select the check box next to Normal to have the normal state displayed in history windows and
logs. The normal state is the opposite of the alarm state.
3. When an alarm point state occurs, you can define how long it must be in that state (the
persistence time) before the alarm point is triggered. Click More and enter the Persistence Time
in milliseconds or seconds.
4. When an alarm point state remains after the alarm has been triggered and acknowledged, you
can define how much time must elapse before the alarm point is re-triggered. Click More and
enter the Re-Alarm Time in milliseconds or seconds.
5. Enter an integer value between 0 and 999 in the Priority fields to define an alarm value for each
alarm level. The highest priority is represented by 999, and 0 represents the lowest. Priority
values can be useful in Runtime for displaying the relative importance of alarm points, and for
filtering out alarms with lower priorities.
6. (Optional) In the Comment fields, enter text that will be displayed in alarm graphics for each
alarm level. The comment can have a maximum of 256 characters. This comment can display
information about the alarm point, for example, or provide instructions to the operator.
7. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
277
277
4. Click the Setup tab and enter a name for the alarm point in the Name field.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your settings.
278
279
279
B
C
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
(A) Alarm Points. The Alarm Points list shows configured alarm points that are associated with
the alarm graphic. To add an alarm point to the list, click Add (B). To remove an alarm point from the
list, click Delete (C).
(B) Add. Click Add to add an alarm point to the PAC Display project. In the Alarm Points dialog box
that appears, you can select previously configured alarm points or configure new points as needed.
To select more than one alarm point at a time, press and hold the CTRL key and then click each point
you want to add. See Configuring Alarm Points on page 261 for information on adding and
configuring alarm points.
(C) Delete. Select an alarm point in the list and click Delete to remove it from the alarm graphic.
The alarm point is not deleted from the PAC Display project or from any other alarm graphic.
(D) Alarm Type. Choose the type of the alarm graphic by selecting Detailed, Summary, or
History.
Detailed alarms treat each alarm point state as a separate alarm condition. The operator must
acknowledge each alarm point before its name is cleared from the alarm graphic.
For example, if an alarm is in the Lo state and changes to the LoLo state, alarms for both states
are listed in the graphic. Alarm points can be selected and acknowledged from a detailed
alarm.
280
For example, if an alarm is in the Lo state and changes to the LoLo state, only the LoLo state
alarm is listed in the graphic. Alarm points can be selected and acknowledged from a summary
alarm.
History alarms list each change of state for each alarm point. Alarm points cannot be
acknowledged from a history alarm.
(E) Color. For each of the following items, click a color square and select a color in the Color dialog
box that appears.
(F) Alarm Font. Click Alarm Font to select the font used in the alarm graphic.
(G) Use for Header. Select Use for Header to have the alarm font you selected appear in the
alarm graphics column headers.
(H) Column Format. Click Column Format to set the information that appears on the alarm
graphic. In the Alarm Format dialog box that appears, select the information the alarm graphic will
display, and the width alarm graphic columns will appear on screen. See Setting the Alarm Format
below for configuration information.
(I) Hot Keys. Click Hot Keys to configure keys on the keyboard that the operator can use to
acknowledge alarms. In the Alarm Hot Keys dialog box that appears, select keys or key combinations
the operator can use to acknowledge one or more alarms. Only detailed and summary alarm
graphics can have hot keys. See Assigning Alarm Hot Keys on page 282 for more information.
(J) Max Lines. Enter a number to set the maximum number of alarm point lines a history alarm
graphic can contain. When this number is exceeded, the oldest alarm point is removed to make
room for the new point. The History alarm type must be selected for this option to be available.
(K) Lock Ascending/Descending. You can lock the history alarm display in either ascending
or descending order. By default, the display order is not locked. If locked, no sort arrow appears in
the column header and clicking on a column header does not sort by the column.
(L) OK. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
Now well look at the additional steps needed to complete the settings in the Alarm Configuration
dialog box.
281
281
1. Click the Column Format button on the Alarm Configuration dialog box.
The Alarm Format dialog box appears.
2. Select the check box next to the name of each column that you want to appear in the alarm
graphic or printed alarm log.
3. For each column name that you want to use, enter the desired column width (in pixels) in the
Width field.
For alarm graphics, the widths are an approximate guideline for how wide the columns will
appear on screen. For printed alarm logs, the widths are absolute values. If a number or text
cannot fit into a printer column, it will be truncated.
282
2. Select a key in the drop-down list for the function you want to use:
Acknowledge. This hot key will have the same effect as pushing the alarms
"Acknowledge" button
Acknowledge All. This hot key will have the same effect as pushing the alarms
"Acknowledge All" button
Select List. This highlights the alarm point list on the display. Once the alarm point list is
highlighted, cursor keys can be used to select alarm points for acknowledgment.
3. If you want to use the CTRL and/or SHIFT keys in combination with the key youve chosen, select
Ctrl, Shift, or both.
283
283
To set how an alarm appears in PAC Display Runtime, select one or more of the following options in
the Runtime Options group:
All alarms enabled at startupEnables all alarms when the project starts in Runtime.
Alarms Enabled menu itemMakes the Alarms Enabled menu available for the user to enable
and disable all alarms.
Priority Filter menu itemMakes the Priority Filter menu available for the user to control
whether to view all alarms, or only alarms exceeding a specified priority value.
Display message box for new alarm pointsMakes a dialog box appear containing
information about the alarm point. The user can acknowledge the alarm in this dialog box, or
close it and acknowledge the alarm at a later time. See also, Configuring Alarm Points on
page 261 to adjust this setting on a per-alarm basis.
NOTE: Setting or clearing this setting in the Alarming Setup dialog will set or clear this option for all
alarm points. Therefore, you should set this global default first, and then adjust the setting on a
per-alarm point basis.
Show Warning StateAn alarm point is considered to be in a warning state when in one or
both of the following conditions:
a. A persistence time has been configured for the alarm point (see Entering Discrete Alarm
Conditions on page 274 and Entering Alarm Values on page 276) and the alarm has been
triggered, but is waiting for the persistence time to expire.
b. An alarm point has the Re-Alarm Time option configured and is still in the triggered state
after being acknowledged. (To see the Re-Alarm option, select Configure > Alarm Points. Then
click the Add or Modify button, click the Discrete or Value tab (depending on the alarm type),
and click one of the More buttons.)
When selected, the Show Warning State option enables all alarm points to be displayed in the
alarm graphic when these points enter the warning state. If alarm points have already been
configured, you can select specific alarm points only to be displayed in the warning state. To do
this, first select this option, then click Choose... to open the Choose Warning State dialog box.
Select the alarm points you to display in the alarm state, then click OK. Select All to select all of
the alarm points. Select Clear All to de-select them.
See also, Configuring Alarm Points on page 261.
284
NOTE: To override this behavior when configuring new alarm points or modifying existing alarm
points, use the Show Warning State option in the Notification Options section of the Alarm Point
dialog. See Configuring Alarm Points on page 261.
To define the changes a user can make to an alarm in PAC Display Runtime, select one or more of the
following options in the User Adjustable group:
EMail Options
Use the EMail tab to configure email to be sent for alarm points:
1. Select Configure > Alarming Setup, and then click the EMail tab.
2. Select Enable Alarm Point EMail, and choose one of the following options:
Send Email for all alarm pointsCreates and sends an email to the recipients you enter.
Send Email only for alarm points I chooseClick Choose to open a dialog box listing all
alarm points currently configured. Check the alarm points for which an email is to be sent.
285
285
Choose Select All to select all alarm points. Choose Clear All to clear all selected alarm
points. Click OK to confirm your selection.
3.
4.
5.
Send Email for alarm points with prioritiesSends email only for alarm points with a
priority greater than or equal to that specified. This is useful for alarm points where only a
specific state (such as HiHi or LoLo) warrant an email, or for other critical alarm points.
Under Email Details, select the level of information that will be sent in the email. By default, all
emails will include the name of the alarm point. You can also select State, Value, Comment and
Priority to be included.
Select Include Warning State if you want to send an email when the alarm point enters the
Warning state.
Click Send To to launch the Email Recipients dialog:
6. Click To, Cc, or Bcc to open a dialog to enter the email addresses of the recipients. When you
have entered an email address, you can do any of the following things:
To modify an entry, double-click the entry in the list to open a dialog box
286
1. Select Enable Alarm Point Alert Window to enable alarm points that have entered a Warning
state to appear in the Alert Window in Runtime.
2. Under When No Alarm Points in Alert Window select one of the following options:
Hide the WindowRemoves the Alert Window from the screen when the last alarm point
has been removed from the window.
287
287
Minimize Window but Leave Visible on ScreenCollapses the contents of the window to
just the caption bar when the last alarm point has been removed from the window, and
leaves the collapsed window on screen.
Leave Window Open and Visible on ScreenLeaves the window open and visible when
the last alarm point has been removed from the window.
1. To choose a printer to send alarm data to, select Printing Enabled and then choose a printer
from the Selected Printers list. If you want to use a printer that does not appear on the list, you
will need to install the printer so that it can be accessed from your PC. Refer to the
documentation from Microsoft and your computer manufacturer if you are not sure how to do
this.
Note that if you move the PAC Display project from one Windows operating system to another,
you must reselect the printers.
2. To choose the alarm information that appears on the printed alarm log, click the Column
Format button. In the Alarm Format dialog box that appears, set the format in which the alarm
graphic will appear on screen and the information it will contain. See Setting the Alarm
Format on page 281 for configuration information.
3. If you want History Alarm windows to be refreshed (have their contents updated) each time
they open, select Reload History Alarms. This option is only available when file logging has also
been enabled.
4. To save a log file of alarm data to disk, select File Logging Enabled and click File Setup.
In the Alarm Logging File Access dialog box that opens, you can configure the name, location,
line format, and other settings for the log file where the alarm data will be saved.
288
B
C
D
E
F
G
L
H
I
J
K
(A) Directory Path. Choose the directory where the alarm log file will be saved. Click Name and
enter the directory path in the field next to it, or click Browse to find a directory path. Click Use
Project Directory to save the alarm log file to the PAC Display project directory. (This occurs by
default if you dont specify another location.)
(B) File Name. Select Automatic, Fixed, or From strategy to determine how the alarm log file
name will be created, and then fill in additional information as needed for that option.
If the Automatic option is used, log files are named based on the rules described in Naming Historic
Log Files and SuperTrend Files on page 236. If you select this option, files are named using the
rollover convention if required; this is described in more detail on page 237. If rollover is not used,
the file is named alarmlog.alm. The Automatic option is used by default if you do not select
another option.
(C) Fixed Name. If you selected the Fixed option in B, enter a file name here. The file name can
be any valid, eight-character DOS file name and doesnt require a three-character file extension.
Note that if you dont specify an extension, one is not added automatically.
(D) String Name. If you selected the From strategy option in B, enter a PAC Control string
tagname here. Use the Tag Selection button
to quickly enter the tag containing the name of the
alarm log file. When the trigger starts the alarm log, the string containing the file name is read, and
the new data is appended to the log file if the file already exists. If the file doesnt already exist, it is
created. The rollover naming convention doesnt apply to this type of file name.
If the string in D is an invalid file name, the default name of the log file is created using the following
rules:
289
289
If the string is empty, the project directory is added to Default Name (E) and the extension .alm
is used.
If the string is not empty and a project directory is not specified as the directory path, the Name
in A is added to Default Name (E) .
If the project directory is specified as the path, or the previous step failed, the project directory
is added to Default Name (E) and the extension .alm is used. If the project directory is read-only
or there is not enough room left on the drive containing the project directory, an error message
indicates that the file could not be created.
(E) Default Name. Enter a default file name here in case the file name used in String Name (D) is
invalid. The file name can be any valid, eight-character DOS file name. The three-character file
extension .alm is assigned by PAC Display.
(F) Line Format. Click to configure the character, or delimiter, used to separate the data in the log
file, to choose the type of quotes used for each data line, and where to insert carriage returns. You
configure these parameters in the Line Format dialog box that appears. See page 236 for more
information.
(G) Lines Buffered. Enter the number of lines of data your PC will save to a memory buffer
before writing the information to the alarm log file. When choosing a number, keep in mind that the
lower the number of buffered data lines, the more frequently the computer has to write to the file.
Alternately, the higher the number of data lines buffered in memory, the more data that will be lost
if your PC loses power or has a system failure. A valid entry is any number between 0 and 999; the
default is 20 files.
(H) Number of Files to Retain. Enter the maximum number of alarm log files that can be
created using rollover before the oldest file is overwritten. For example, if you enter 10 and your
rollover time period is set to hours, you will have 10 alarm log files created for 10 hours of data
before the oldest file is overwritten with new data. See page 237 for more information on rollover
settings.
(I) Rollover. Choose the rollover time period here. Select None to have all logged data placed in a
single data file named alarmlog.alm. If you select Weeks, also select the day of the week to have the
files rollover. Otherwise the files will rollover on Thursday, the default. Logging begins when the PAC
Display project is loaded, and data collected will be appended to the existing data file. The size of
the file is limited only by available disk space.
To use the Trigger option, see Using the Rollover Trigger Option on page 233. Logging begins
when the Start Trigger is activated, and data collected will be appended to the existing data file. The
size of the file is limited only by available disk space.
(J) Use 0.01 Sec Resolution. Select this option to log the time in hundredths of a second.
(K) Keep File Open. Select Keep file open to leave the log file open to allow data to be
appended to the alarm log file more quickly. If you leave this box unchecked (the default setting),
the file is closed after each time data is written to it. This provides greater data integrity than leaving
the file open.
(L) OK. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
290
1. To enter the name of the sound you want played, click Browse and locate the sound file.
If you select Use Project Directory, the sound file must reside in the project directory. This
option is useful if the project directory might be moved to a different location.
NOTE: Only one sound file can be selected in the Alarming Setup dialog box, but PAC Display has other
ways of playing sounds. See Configuring a Sound on page 243 and Configuring Alarm Points on
page 261 for more information.
2. Select an option to determine how many times the sound will play when a new alarm occurs:
Play sound once when any alarm is activeThe sound plays once, then stops.
Play sound continuously when any alarm is activeThe sound continues to play until the
operator acknowledges all active alarms.
Play sound continuously until any alarm is acknowledgedThe sound continues to play
until the operator acknowledges at least one active alarm.
3. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
See also Configuring Alarm Points on page 261 to assign a sound to a specific alarm point.
NOTE: If an alarm point has been configured to play the global sound file, but then the global sound file is
cleared in this dialog box, a message will ask you to configure a default sound or proceed with this choice
for the alarm point.
291
291
292
Introduction
This chapter describes the versions of PAC Display Runtime that can be used, and explains how to
customize features that are available when your project runs in PAC Display Runtime. It also explains
how to use features that an operator sees and works with when using Runtime.
In This Chapter
Runtime Regular and Monitor-Only Versions ...................... 293
Using Monitor-Only Runtime and Configurator................. 294
Using the Runtime Setup Dialog Box...................................... 293
Runtime Setup: General Tab........................................................ 295
Runtime Setup: Control Engine Tab ......................................... 299
Runtime Setup: Security Tab ....................................................... 301
Runtime Setup: I/O Unit Tag Tab ............................................... 320
Using Runtime ................................................................................... 322
Launching Runtime in the Windows Startup Menu......... 340
The File and Help menus are the only menu items displayed. If the PAC Display project has been
configured to hide the menu bar, however, even these menus are not visible. See Restricting
the Operator on page 303 for information on configuring the menu bar in Runtime.
The only operator-driven dynamic attribute that can be used in the Runtime monitor-only
version is opening or closing windows. Keep this in mind when developing the PAC Display
293
293
project; if there is a window that you do not want the operator to see, for example, do not use
the open/close dynamic attribute with a graphic object.
See the next section, Using Monitor-Only Runtime and Configurator.
Using Monitor-Only Runtime and Configurator
Using the Runtime Setup Dialog Box
Runtime Setup: General Tab
Runtime Setup: Control Engine Tab
Runtime Setup: Security Tab
Runtime Setup: I/O Unit Tag Tab
Using Runtime
Launching Runtime in the Windows Startup Menu
2. Now change the file name of the monitor-only Runtime application to the original name of the
regular version. This is done by changing DisplayX.basic.exe to DisplayR.basic.exe.
After making these changes, the monitor-only version of Runtime will start when you select Save
Project and Load Runtime in PAC Display Configurator.
To use the regular version of Runtime again, reverse the steps above.
294
(A) Draw Window Initial State. Use these options to onfigure how the projects windows will
look when the project is first opened in Runtime. To set the default options, check the Use Default
check box, and then click Define Default to set the default options. In the Pop Window dialog box
that opens, select windows and configure whether the window is opened, closed, or iconified. See
Using Draw Windows and URL Windows on page 93 for additional options for configuring window
states in Runtime.
(B) Main Window Style Options. Use these options to customize the PAC Display Runtime
application window.
Always Maximized keeps the main window completely open, covering the entire screen.
When this option is selected, the minimize and maximize button options are not available;
deselect Always Maximize if you want to choose the minimize or maximize options.
295
295
Use Custom Caption lets you enter a title that will appear in the title bar of the main window.
Enter the title in the Custom Caption field.
If a customized caption ends with a hyphen (-), the project file name is added to the caption.
Title Bar displays the Windows title bar for the main window. If space is limited on your
operator interface, deselect this option to slightly increase the viewable area thats available.
If you deselect the Title Bar option, note that all options within the group except for Always
Maximized are unavailable.
(C) Keyboard Setup. Use these options to set up your PAC Display project to run on a
touchscreen terminal.
Use On-Screen Keyboard for Touchscreens. Check this option to enable the use of an
on-screen keyboard with the Send String and Send Value Dynamic Attributes. Use this option
when PAC Display Runtime is running on a computer without a physical keyboard and has a
touchscreen. Selecting this option enables all Send String and Send Value Dynamic Attributes
in a project.
Include 'Insert ASCII' in Screen-Keyboard. Select this option to include the 'Insert ASCII'
parameter in the On-Screen Send String dialog box. The 'Insert ASCII' feature allows a user to
enter any character value between 0-255. This option is only available for the Send String
Dynamic Attribute. The Use On-Screen Keyboard for Touch Screens option must be checked in
order for this option to be available.
Format Value Data With Commas. Displays large numbers using commas. For example, one
million displays as 1,000,000. However, if a data field in an existing project is too small to display
large numbers with commas, you can de-select this option. Without commas, one million
displays as 1000000.
Trend Backward Compatibility. Displays Trend data in the same manner as it is displayed in
OptoDisplay. This is the same effect as selecting None as the y-axis Label Position on the Trend
Configuration dialog box, except that the labels are displayed. Multiple ranges appear to
overlap, and all pens are displayed. As shown in the following example, if pen 1 has a range of
0-100 and pen 2 has a range of 300-400, the y-axis has a range of 0-100 and 300-400
simultaneously and both pens are displayed. By default, this option is disabled.
Disable Exit Confirmation. Keeps PAC Display Runtime from displaying a confirmation
message when you close the program.
Send +1 for Discrete Integer Writes. Allows PAC Display Runtime to mimic OptoDisplay
Runtime when sending Discrete Writes to integer variables that have no bit index specified (the
bit index field is left blank). This is helpful when upgrading projects from FactoryFloor or
OptoDisplay, or when there is incorrect logic in strategies that tests against true rather than not
false.
If the bit index field is left blank when configuring a discrete write to an integer, a message says,
No Bit Index specified. All bits will be modified. By using this option, Runtime sets only the first
bit of the integer to a 1, resulting in an actual integer value of +1 (the same as OptoDisplay).
This option affects all the discrete write options: Set, Toggle, Direct, and Reverse.
296
(E) Sound Options. If you want all sounds to play as they occur, select Play sounds
simultaneously. This allows each sound that occurs to play at the same time other sounds are
playing. If this option is not selected, each sound that occurs will play one at a time in a round-robin
fashion.
(F) Date Format. Use the Date Format options to change how the date appears in Alarm
windows, SuperTrend objects, and historic log files. When you switch from one date format to
another, any SuperTrends placed in a window are immediately updated to reflect the selected date
format.
You can select one of two date formats:
62
Pen 1
Pen 2
305
If the Play sounds simultaneously is checked, sounds start playing immediately, regardless if other
sounds are still playing, and will overlap any currently playing sounds.
For examples, see Setting Up Sound Options on page 298
(G) Allow Multiple Runtimes. Select this option to allow multiple runtimes to run at the same
time. However, before proceeding, make sure to read the following note:
CAUTION: Before using this option, consider the following things:
If each project is logging to files (SuperTrend, Historic, Operator Logging, etc.), are the projects saving
data to the same file(s)? If so, system instability or a crash may occur.
297
297
Scenario 1. Sound A and sound B are both triggered at the same time.
If the Play sounds simultaneously is not checked, sound A will play five times, and then sound
B will play three times.
AAAAABBB
(time > )
If the Play sounds simultaneously is checked, sounds A and B will play at the same time with
sound A playing five times, and sound B playing three times.
AAAAA
BBB
(time >)
If the Play sounds simultaneously is not checked, the initial five instances of sound A will
continue to play until all five have played. Then the next five instances of sound A will play.
AAAAAAAAAA
(time > )
If the Play sounds simultaneously is checked, when sound A is triggered the second time, it
will start immediately, and it may overlap the initial five sounds from the first trigger.
AAAAA
AAAAA
(time >)
Scenario 3. Both sounds are triggered at the same time. Sound A is one second long, and sound B
is three seconds long.
If the Play sounds simultaneously is not checked, the sounds will play one after the other.
AAAAAB--B--B-(time > )
If the Play sounds simultaneously is checked, the sounds will play at the same time. Sound A
will end before sound B.
AAAAA
B--B--B-(time > )
298
If you deselect the Title Bar option, note that all options within the group except for Always
Maximized are unavailable.
(A) Off-line Control Engine Color Options. If one or more control engines stops
communicating, you can have all graphics with dynamic attributes tied to the control engine(s)
change color to indicate the control engines state. To do this, select a Last Known Value color and a
Comm Failure color, and then click the Enable Graphic Color Change checkbox.
If any graphic in the project uses the View Control Engine Status dynamic attribute, the graphic will
still change color based on control engine status. If the color used for this dynamic attribute is
different from the Offline control engine color, you must confirm which color setting to use.
(B) Synchronize Control Engine Clocks to PC Clock. Enable control engine clocks to be
synchronized with the PC clock on the PC that is running OptoOPCServer.
Enable Auto Synchronization: When enabled, set the the day and time that the control
engine clock is automatically synchronized with the PC clock.
Synchronize at Runtime startup: When enabled, the control engines are synchonized with
the PC clock every time Runtime is started.
299
299
Synchronize Control Engine With: When enabled, choose which PC to use to sync the
control engine's clock. If you choose Remote Computer, a dialog box appears to browse to the
remote computer. This option is useful if there are several PCs running the same PAC Display
project gathering data from the same control engine because clocks may vary considerably
from one PC to the next.
(C) Controller Driven Dynamic Attributes. If Allow Runtime Tooltips is enabled, when a
user places the cursor over a graphic that has controller driven dynamic attributes in Runtime, the
current values are displayed in a pop-up tooltip. See also, Using Allow Runtime Tooltips.
If a graphic is configured with the Control Engine Status dynamic attribute, the tooltip will display
the status of each control engine that is currently being monitored. The next example shows the
status of two control engines. The color is always the color of the worst-case control enginein this
case, the one that has a COMM FAILURE.
300
If a graphic is displaying controller driven dynamic attribute for an alarm point status, the tooltip
shows the state of the alarm point as well as the value of the point as shown here.
Prevent User Exit. Check this to prevent the user from changing the project currently open in
PAC Display Runtime or from exiting PAC Display Runtime. Once the project starts in Runtime,
an operator wont be able to exit the PAC Display Runtime application.
Hide Menu Bar Permanently. Check this to prevent display of the menu bar in PAC Display
Runtime. This restricts operator interaction with Runtime menu commands to only what youve
301
301
defined in the project itself. The ESC key will not activate the menu bar, and pressing the F1 key
wont invoke the Runtime online help system.
When the menu bar is not visible due to this feature, pressing the F1 function key does not
invoke PAC Display Runtime online help system. To offer access to the online help system,
configure a graphic with an Execute Menu Item and specify the Help menu item.
Global Operator Driven Permissions. Click the Configure button to add a higher-level tier
of security. It allows the globally configured users to access any security-configured operator
driven dynamic attribute, without having to be specifically configured for that attribute. See
also, Adding Global Operator Driven Permissions on page 311 and Configuring Runtime User
Logins on page 303.
You can also configure a graphic so that Runtime commands execute when the graphic is
clicked. This is done by assigning Runtime menu commands to the graphic using the Execute
Menu Item dynamic attribute; see Execute Menu Item on page 156 for instructions.
Disable Security if Currently Logged in. Check this if you want a logged in user who has
global operator driven permissions not to have to log in to modify an operator-driven attribute.
If this option is selected, such a user does not have to enter a Windows user name and
password in order to perform an operator driven command on a graphic in Runtime.
Enable Runtime Operator Action Logging. Choose this option to record all use of the PAC
Display project to a log file.
Header Line. Enter text that will appear at the top of the Runtime Operator Action log file.
Log File/Encrypt Log File. Click Log File to specify the name and contents of the Runtime
Operator Action log file. Configure the file name and other parameters in the Event Log
Configuration dialog box that appears. To have the file optionally encrypted, select Encrypt Log
File.
Prevent Disabling. Select this option to prevent a user from disabling the Event Log Viewer
during Runtime. You must first select Start enabled to get this option.
Start Enabled. Select this option to enable the Event Log Viewer at startup.
Start Hidden. Select this option to prevent the Event Log Viewer from displaying when
Runtime launches; it runs in the background instead-. In this mode you can see the Event Log
Viewer by choosing View > Event Log in Runtime.
See also, Enabling the Event Log Viewer on page 313.
302
Allowed Users. Choose this option to allow selected users to log in to PAC Display Runtime
after another user has logged off. The sole purpose of this option is to inform PAC Display
Runtime of the user who will be performing operator driven actions for the Runtime Operator
Action Log File feature. See also, Configuring Runtime User Logins on page 303.
Add / Modify User Password. Choose this option to require a user to log in every time
Runtime is started. See also, Configuring Password for Modifying List of Users in Runtime on
page 306
See also, Logging Operator Actions on page 314 and Configuring a Runtime Operator Action Log
File on page 315.
To prevent the operator from exiting PAC Display Runtime, select Prevent User Exit in the
Security Option group. Once the project starts in Runtime, an operator wont be able to exit the
PAC Display Runtime application.
To hide the menu bar from the operator, select Hide Menu Bar Permanently. This restricts
operator interaction with Runtime menu commands to only what youve defined in the project
itself. The ESC key will not activate the menu bar, and pressing the F1 key wont invoke the
Runtime online help system.
To allow selected users to log in to PAC Display Runtime or to set up Global Operator Driven
Permissions, see Configuring Runtime User Logins below.
You can also configure a graphic so that Runtime commands execute when the graphic is clicked.
This is done by assigning Runtime menu commands to the graphic using the Execute Menu Item
dynamic attribute; see Execute Menu Item on page 156 for instructions.
Logging in and out of Runtime does not change the user currently logged on to the PC in
Windows. The user that initially logged into Windows remains the Windows user.
If no names are configured as Allowed Users, the option to log out of Runtime is disabled in
Runtime.
See also, Adding Global Operator Driven Permissions on page 311 to add a higher-level tier of
security.
1. In Configurator, choose Configure > Runtime to open the Runtime Setup dialog box, then click
the Security tab.
303
303
2. In the Login Options section, click the Allowed Users button to open the Runtime Log-In
Allowed Users dialog box.
1. Click the Add button, and enter the user name and password (two times) for the user who will
be allowed to log in to Runtime.
304
2. To configure a specific login schedule with up to four time periods, under Allowed Log In
Schedule, select the first login time. You can choose a specific day of the week, Weekdays,
Weekends, Never, or Any time.
For each additional login period, select Enable additional scheduled time, then select the login
time. To disable a schedule, deselect Enable additional scheduled time for that time period.
3. To configure a user to be logged out automatically when Runtime has been no activity for a
specified amount of time, under Inactivity Timeout, enter the amount of time that the PAC
Display project may remain idle. The units can be set in Minutes, Hours, Days, and Weeks. To
disable the automatic log out feature, enter a 0 in the text entry field.
A PAC Display Runtime project is considered to be idle if:
The mouse is not moved
A menu command is not invoked
An Operator Driven attribute is not clicked
NOTE: Trigger-based commands are not included in the above list. For example, if a window opens or
closes, a recipe uploads or downloads, or an alarm point state changes, these are not considered to
be operator interactions with PAC Display.
4. To require a user to change his or her password after a specified amount of time, under Require
Password Change Every, enter the amount of time. The units can be set in Days, Weeks, and
Months.
Beginning 14 days prior to the expiration of a password, the user will be notified when logging
in that the password will expire, and be given the option to change it.
To disable this feature, enter a 0 in the text entry field.
305
305
5. To map a users Runtime login user name to his or her global operator driven user name, select
Has Global Operator Driven Access, and then enter the global operator driven user name. This
option must be configured in order for the user logged in to PAC Display Runtime to modify
operator driven attributes without having to log in for each attribute. See also, Adding Global
Operator Driven Permissions on page 311.
6. Click OK. The new user name is added to the list of Allowed Users.
306
2. In the Login Options section, click Add / Modify User Password to open the Enter Password
dialog box.
307
307
1. Click the Add button, and enter the user name and password (two times) for the user who will
be allowed to log in to Runtime.
2. To configure a specific login schedule with up to four time periods, under Allowed Log In
Schedule, select the first login time. You can choose a specific day of the week, Weekdays,
Weekends, Never, or Any time.
308
For each additional login period, select Enable additional scheduled time, then select the login
time. To disable a schedule, deselect Enable additional scheduled time for that time period.
3. To configure a user to be logged out automatically when Runtime has been no activity for a
specified amount of time, under Automatic Log Out After, enter the amount of time that the
PAC Display project may remain idle. The units can be set in Minutes, Hours, Days, and Weeks.
To disable the automatic log out feature, enter a 0 in the text entry field.
A PAC Display Runtime project is considered to be idle if:
The mouse is not moved
A menu command is not invoked
An Operator Driven attribute is not clicked
NOTE: Trigger-based commands are not included in the above list. For example, if a window opens or
closes, a recipe uploads or downloads, or an alarm point state changes, these are not considered to
be operator interactions with PAC Display.
4. To require a user to change his or her password after a specified amount of time, under Require
Password Change Every, enter the amount of time. The units can be set in Days, Weeks, and
Months.
Beginning 14 days prior to the expiration of a password, the user will be notified when logging
in that the password will expire, and be given the option to change it.
To disable this feature, enter a 0 in the text entry field.
5. To map a users Runtime login user name to his or her global operator driven user name, select
Has Global Operator Driven Access, and then enter the global operator driven user name. This
option must be configured in order for the user logged in to PAC Display Runtime to modify
operator driven attributes without having to log in for each attribute. See also, Adding Global
Operator Driven Permissions on page 311.
6. Click OK. The new user name is added to the list of Allowed Users.
309
309
5. For each of the following options, click Browse to locate the target directory, then enter a
filename and click OK.
310
Click External File to specify the primary location for the user login configuration file.
Click Copy To to specify the backup location for the user login configuration file. This option is
enabled when you select External File. The backup copy is used if the primary file becomes
corrupted or is otherwise unavailable.
311
311
2. Under Global Operator Driven Permissions, click the Configure button to open the Runtime
Log-In Allowed Users dialog box.
3. Select the Domain and Users/Groups from the drop-down menus, select Grant Access, then
click OK.
4. If you want a logged in user who has global operator driven permissions not to have to log in
to modify an operator-driven attribute, select Disable Security Dialog if Currently Logged in. If
this option selected, such a user does not have to enter a Windows user name and password in
order to perform an operator driven command on a graphic in Runtime. See also, Adding a
New User on page 304.
312
5. Normally, Runtime enters the last sent value into the Send Value and Send String dialogs.
However, if the last sent value was a password, or other numeric code that should not be
available the next time the dialog is displayed, check Clear Send Dialog Input Fields.
With one or more users configured in Runtime, the Security > Operator Driven Attribute Access >
Log In option is available for users to log in.
1. In Runtime, choose Security > Operator Driven Attribute Access > Log In (or Log Out).
2. In the Enter User Credentials dialog box, enter your Windows user name and Password, then
click OK.
CAUTION: As long as a globally configured user is logged in, anyone can access the security-configured
operator driven dynamic attributes. To prevent unauthorized access, it is the responsibility of the
configured user to log out when finished.
Prevent disabling. Select this opt ion to prevent a user from disabling the Event Log Viewer
during Runtime. You must first select Start enabled to get this option.
Start enabled. Select this option to enable the Event Log Viewer at startup. Uncheck this option
to keep the Event Log Viewer running in the background rather than on top.
Start hidden . Select this option to prevent the Event Log Viewer from displaying when Runtime
launches. In this mode you can see the Event Log Viewer by choosing View > Event Log in Runtime.
See Using the Event Log Viewer on page 326 for information on using the Event Log Viewer in
Runtime, and Configuring the Event Log File on page 318 to learn about enabling saving the Event
313
313
Log to a file and setting the format in which Event Log files are saved. By default the Event Log is not
saved to a file.
Control EngineControl engine running the PAC Control strategy that the PAC Display project
is accessing
Discrete controller variables display Off values as 0, and On/Set values as 1. Discrete I/O points are
logged as 0 (Off ) and -1 (minus 1) - for On/Set.
In this example, the log shows that the operator edgar opened and closed the PAC Display project
cfactory.UUI using the computer MFG-00.
Time
Action Taken
User
Computer
12/11/2010
10:22:28.230
edgar
MFG-00
12/11/2010
10:59:57.442
edgar
MFG-00
The next example shows that the same operator edgar changed the setpoint value of
fTemperatureSetpoint from 200 to 150 on the same project.
314
Time
Control Engine
Tag
User
200.0000
edgar MFG-00
150.0000
Computer
The Runtime Logging File Setup dialog box appears. Configuring a Runtime logging file is
identical to configuring a Runtime event log; follow the instructions in Configuring the Event
Log File on page 318 and then go to the next step below.
NOTE: To create a single networked file that logs the operator actions of all the networked PCs running
PAC Display, make sure each PC writes to the same networked file. This allows you to view all the
operator actions of the networked PCs from a central location. In order for the date and time stamps
to be useful, make sure that the time on each PC is synchronized with the standard network server
time.
5. Select Encrypt Log File if you want the log file saved as an encrypted document. See
Encrypting and Decrypting the Operator Action Log File on page 317 for information on
using encrypted files.
315
315
If there is a database configured, a dialog shows the default settings for the table that will be
created and logged to.
316
Press Yes to create a new table and start logging to that table.
Press No to rename the existing table and continue logging to that table.
317
317
2. Click Browse next to the Log file to decrypt field and locate the encrypted operator action log
file.
3. Click Browse next to the Destination log file name field and select a filename and location
where the decrypted file will be saved.
Skip this step if the default name and destination for the decrypted file is acceptable.
4. Select View decrypted file in Notepad to automatically open the file in Windows Notepad
after it is decrypted.
When this option is selected, you can also select Delete decrypted file after viewing to have
the file deleted automatically when Notepad closes.
5. Select Delete encrypted log file to have the encrypted log file deleted automatically after it is
decrypted.
6. Click Decrypt to decrypt the file.
7. Click OK to close the log file decryption window.
318
2. Select Enabled in the Event Log Configuration dialog box to automatically create an event log
file when you start the PAC Display project in Runtime.
3. Click File Setup to customize the event log file.
The Event Log File Configuration dialog box appears.
C
D
E
F
G
H
(A) Name. Choose the directory where the event log file will be saved. Click Name and enter the
directory path in the field next to it, or click Browse to find a directory path. Click Use Project
Directory to save the event log file to the PAC Display project directory. (This occurs by default if you
dont specify a location.)
NOTE: To create a single networked file that logs the events of all the networked PCs running PAC Display,
make sure each PC writes to the same networked file. This allows you to view all the events of the
networked PCs from a central location. In order for the date and time stamps to be useful, make sure that
the time on each PC is synchronized with the standard network server time.
319
319
(B) Source. Automatic is the only choice for creating the event log file name, and is selected by
default.
(C) Line Format. Click to configure the character, or delimiter, used to separate the data in the
log file, to choose the type of quotes used for each data line, and where to insert carriage returns.
You configure these parameters in the Line Format dialog box that appears. See Setting Log File
Line Format on page 236 for more information.
(D) Lines Buffered. Enter the number of lines of data your PC will save to a memory buffer
before writing the information to the event log file. When choosing a number, keep in mind that the
lower the number of buffered data lines, the more frequently the computer has to write to the file.
Alternately, the higher the number of data lines buffered in memory, the more data that will be lost
if your PC loses power or has a system failure. A valid entry is any number between 0 and 999; the
default is 20 files.
(E) Number of Files to Retain. Enter the maximum number of event log files that can be
created using rollover before the oldest file is overwritten. For example, if you enter 10 and your
rollover time period is set to hours, you will have 10 event log files created for 10 hours of data
before the oldest file is overwritten with new data. See Naming Files Using Rollover on page 237
for more information on rollover settings.
(F) Rollover. Choose the rollover time period here. Select None to have all logged data placed in a
single data file named eventlog.msg. If you select Weeks, also select the day of the week to have the
files rollover. Otherwise the files will rollover on Thursday, the default. Logging begins when the PAC
Display project is loaded, and data collected will be appended to the existing data file. The size of
the file is limited only by available disk space.
To use the Trigger option, see Using the Rollover Trigger Option on page 233. Logging begins
when the Start Trigger is activated, and data collected will be appended to the existing data file. The
size of the file is limited only by available disk space.
(G) Use 0.01 Sec Resolution. Select this option to log the time in hundredths of a
second.
(H) Keep File Open. Select Keep file open to leave the log file open to allow data to be
appended to the event log file more quickly. If you leave this box unchecked (the default setting),
the file is closed after each time data is written to it. This provides greater data integrity than leaving
the file open.
(I) OK. Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box.
320
Select the checkbox to have the PAC Display project communicate directly with that I/O unit.
Deselect the checkbox to have the PAC Display project not communicate directly with that I/O
unit, and instead access I/O tags through the control engine.
NOTE: To protect a strategy in case of a power loss, be sure to save the strategy to flash memory. You can
save it to flash just once, when needed, or save every time the strategy is downloaded. For more
information, see the PAC Control Users Guide.
Your control system probably uses Ethernet-based I/O units, which combine Opto 22 SNAP PAC
R-series controllers or EB-series brains with I/O modules and an I/O rack. In the I/O Unit Tags tab, you
can configure how the PAC Display project communicates with these units. Controlling how the PAC
Display project communicates with an I/O unit can improve the response time for reading and
writing remote I/O points over getting that information from the controller.
Normally a PAC Display project running on a PC gets information such as I/O point state or value by
communicating directly with the I/O unit itself. Other information, however, is not obtained from an
I/O unit (for example, the result of a calculation). Instead, this information comes from the tag
variables on the control engine running the PAC Control or OptoControl strategy. In the I/O Unit Tags
tab, you can configure whether the PAC Display project accesses I/O unit information directly from
the unit, or only accesses that information from the control engine.
NOTE: Being able to specify how this communication occurs also allows you to use the dual Ethernet
interfaces of the SNAP PAC R-series brains to segment part of an Ethernet network.
321
321
USING RUNTIME
Using Runtime
Opening a Project in Runtime on page 322
Logging Out of and In to Runtime on page 322
Running Multiple Runtimes on page 323
Using the Event Log Viewer on page 326
Viewing and Changing Control Engines on page 326
Viewing and Changing Scanner Status on page 328
Switching a Window between Control Engines on page 329
Viewing Alarm Graphics on page 330
Modifying Alarm Points on page 331
Disabling Alarm Points in Runtime on page 333
Using SuperTrends in Runtime on page 334
Using XY Plots in Runtime on page 337
Writing Directly to Individual Elements on page 337
How a Combo Box Behaves in Runtime on page 338
Using a PID Button on page 338
Click the Windows Start button, select Programs > PAC Project > PAC Display Runtime, and
then select File > Open Project.
In the Open Project dialog box that appears, select the PAC Display project you want to open.
With a project open in PAC Display Configurator, select File > Save Project and Load Runtime.
Changes to the current project in PAC Display Configurator are saved, and the project is opened
in Runtime. The Save Project and Load Runtime feature lets you switch quickly from
Configurator to Runtime, and is a convenient way to test a PAC Display project as you develop
it.
When the project opens, it will start running and youll see the operator interface created in PAC
Display Configurator. The initial state of the draw windows that appear (open, closed, or iconified) is
determined by the Runtime setup configuration. Unless you chose to hide the menu bar when you
configured the project, the menu bar for the main window also appears.
322
2. Click Yes.
If Enable Runtime Operator Action Logging is enabled on the Runtime setup dialog box, an
entry is made in the log and the Log In dialog box opens for the next user.
3. If you want to log in, select your name from the drop-down list, enter the password, and then
click OK. Or, you can click Exit Runtime to shut down PAC Display Runtime.
IMPORTANT: During the time this dialog is displayed, there can be no interaction between a user and
PAC Display Runtime. The current Windows user cannot log off, nor can Windows be shut down.
If the Runtime Operator Action Log is enabled, an entry in the log is made indicating whether the
log in was successful or not and the operator who attempted or succeeded at the log in.
Also, the newly logged on user is set as the user whose actions will be logged in the Runtime
Operator Action Log file.
If each project is logging to files (SuperTrend, Historic, Operator Logging, etc.), are the projects saving
data to the same file(s)? If so, system instability or a crash may occur.
323
323
USING RUNTIME
2. In the Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box, under Operator Driven Attributes, double-click
Launch Application.
The Dynamic Attribute Launch Application dialog box appears.
NOTES:
You can substitute DisplayR.pro.exe.
Make sure to include the surrounding quotes.
There is a space between DisplayR.pro.exe and "<Full ...>"
324
1. Create a batch file for each project. In this example there are two different projects, Project A
and Project B.
Each project batch file has the following format:
cd <Full Path To Runtime>
DisplayR.basic.exe "<Full Path To .UUI Project File>"
exit
The Project A batch file is named LaunchProjectA.bat:
cd "C:\Program Files\Opto22\PAC Project 9.1"
DisplayR.basic.exe "C:\My Projects\ProjectA\ProjectA.UUI"
exit
NOTE: You can substitute DisplayR.pro.exe. Make sure to include the surrounding quotes.
2. Create a master batch file that will run both of the project batch files. This is the batch file that is
actually invoked.
The master batch file has the following format.
cd <Full Path To The Directory Containing Project Batch Files>
START <Name of Project A Batch File>
START <Name of Project B Batch File>
exit
Both LaunchProjectA.bat and LaunchProjectB.bat are in the same directory, C:\batch:
cd "C:\batch"
START LaunchProjectA.bat
START LaunchProjectB.bat
325
325
USING RUNTIME
exit
B
C
D
E
(A) List Area. The list area posts event messages as they occur. Messages will have a date and
time stamp, and a brief message describing the communications event that occurred.
See also, "Appendix A: PAC Display Troubleshooting.
Messages posted to the Event Log can also be saved to a disk file. Refer to Configuring the Event
Log File on page 318 for more information about doing this.
(B) Auto Restore on New Message. To make the Event Log Viewer appear in the foreground
whenever a new message is posted, select Auto Restore on New Message. This option wont be
available if Prevent disabling was selected when the project was set up in PAC Display Configurator.
(C) Enable Awaiting Connection Messages. To display or hide common error messages
that occur when a PAC Display project starts, select or deselect the Enable Awaiting Connection
Messages option.
326
Devices tab. The information in this window updates automatically as control engines and I/O
unitsor devicesare enabled or disabled, or change states between active and inactive. The
Current Device Configuration window can be left open or minimized while the PAC Display project
is running.
(A) IP Addresses. IP addresses for both primary and secondary control engines, as well as any
Ethernet-based I/O units used with those control engines, are listed here. For each device the
following information is displayed:
Device IP Address Assigned IP address for the device. If a secondary control engine or an
I/O unit has been configured for that device, a plus sign + appears in front of the IP address.
Click the plus sign + to see the IP address and status information for that device. Primary
control engine IP addresses are displayed in red, and other devices are displayed in blue.
Enabled/Disabled State Device availability status; if the device is enabled, it is available for
use with a PAC Display project and can be made active. If the device is disabled, it cannot be
made active.
Active/Inactive State Device activity status; an active device is a control engine or I/O unit
that the PAC Display project is currently trying to communicate with. An inactive device is one
that is not being used for communication.
Timeout When a connection has been established with a device, this is the length of time
(in ms) that the PAC Display project will attempt to communicate with the control engine after
no communications are received.
Retries When sending and receiving information to and from the primary control engine,
this is the number of times that the PAC Display project will attempt to communicate with the
control engine after no communications are received.
Connect Timeout When trying to connect to the primary control engine, this is the length
of time (in ms) that the PAC Display project will try to communicate before switching to
another control engine.
327
327
USING RUNTIME
Click Enable to make that device available for use by the PAC Display project.
Click Disable to make the selected device unavailable to the PAC Display project.
Click Set Active to de-activate any currently active device and make the selected device active.
Timeouts and RetriesFor any control engine thats selected, you can also change Timeout,
Retries, and Connect Timeout values.
(C) Expand/Collapse All. Click Expand All to show primary and secondary control engines plus
any Ethernet-based I/O units. Click Collapse All to show only the primary control engines and I/O
units.
(D) View Log. Click View Log to open the file ConfigInfo.txt in Windows Notepad. This text file is
created and updated whenever any of the listed device parameters are modified.
(E) Close. Click Close to close the window and save any changes you made.
(A) List Area. Scanners used by the PAC Display project are listed here by the Windows Network
name of the computer the scanner is running on. For each scanner the following information is
displayed:
328
Scanner Location Name of the PC running the scanner. Primary scanners are displayed in
red, and secondary scanners are displayed in blue.
Active/Inactive State Scanner activity status; an active scanner is checking control engine
tags and I/O unit values, while an inactive one is not.
Enabled/Disabled State Scanner availability status; if the scanner is enabled, it can be used
with a PAC Display project and can be made active. If the scanner is disabled, it cannot be made
active.
Backup Node If a secondary scanner has been configured, that scanner is listed here. (See
Configuring a Remote Scanner in PAC Display Pro on page 70 for instructions on doing this.)
(B) Disable/Activate. For an inactive scanner, select the scanner and do the following:
Click Disable to prevent the PAC Display project from using this scanner.
Click Activate to force the PAC Display project to switch to this scanner from the scanner listed
under Backup Node.
For a currently active scanner, select the scanner and do the following:
Click Disable to stop this scanner and force the PAC Display project to switch to the secondary
scanner (if one has been defined).
(C) View Log. Click View Log to open the file ConfigStatus.txt in Windows Notepad. This text file is
created and updated whenever any of the device parameters listed in B are modified.
(D) Close. Click Close to close the window and save any changes you made.
Additional control engines that you want to switch between must be associated with the PAC
Display project using the Configure > Control Engines menu item.
If you switch to a different control engine and then exit PAC Display Runtime, when the project
is restarted the default control engine for the projectnot the one you switched to
earlierwill be selected.
Trends and SuperTrends must have the Disable Scanning option set to either When Closed or
When Minimized and Closed.
All tags for the graphics in the window must reference the same control engine.
Tag names should not include the name of a control engine. For example, in PAC Control you
shouldnt name a variable Control Engine1_flowrate if the strategy uses a control engine
named Control Engine1.
329
329
USING RUNTIME
Alarms and graphics using the Alarm Point control engine-driven attribute may not be used.
To switch between control engines, start the PAC Display project and do the following:
1. Select Window > Switch Control Engines.
The Select Window(s) for Control Engine Switching dialog box appears.
330
A
Detailed
C
Summary
History
(A) List Area. To sort the information that is displayed, click the column name of the item youd
like to sort by. All the alarm data that appears will be sorted based on the values in that column.
Click the column name again to reverse the sort order. To change the location where columns
appear in an alarm graphic, click the name of a column and drag it to a new location.
(B) Acknowedge. To acknowledge and turn off a single active alarm, select an alarm and click
Acknowledge. When an alarm has been acknowledged, it changes color so it can be easily
identified.
(C) Acknowledge All. To acknowledge and turn off all active alarms, click Acknowledge All.
(D) Silence. (Detailed alarms only) To silence a single active alarm, select an alarm and click
Silence. Silencing an alarm is similar to acknowledging an alarm, and the alarm will not re-alarm
until it has been unsilenced. When an alarm has been silenced, it changes color so it can be easily
identified.
(E) Unsilence. (Detailed alarms only) To unsilence an alarm that has been silenced, select an
alarm and click UnSilence.
331
331
USING RUNTIME
Alarm point settings can be changed in each one of the four alarm ranges available: HiHi, Hi,
Normal, Lo, and LoLo. Each alarm point state has a value that defines its range:
Hi alarms are greater than or equal to the Hi value and less than the HiHi value.
Lo alarms are less than or equal to the Lo value and greater than the LoLo value.
The normal state is between the Hi and Lo values. Each level can enabled or disabled, but at least
one alarm state (HiHi, Hi, Lo, or LoLo) must be enabled.
To view the alarm point settings:
1. Select Alarm > Modify Alarm Points to open the Alarm Points dialog box.
B
C
D
(A) Enable. Select this check box to enable the alarm level for an alarm range.
332
(B) More. Click the More button to change the Persistence Time or the Automatic Re-Alarming
Time in milliseconds or seconds. The persistence time is the time that elapses before the alarm point
is triggered. The re-alarming time is the time that elapses before the alarm point is re-triggered.
(B) Value. Enter the value for an alarm level in the Value field.
(C) Priority. To set a priority for an alarm point, enter an integer value between 0 and 999.
Priority fields define an integer value for each alarm level, and can be useful for displaying the
relative importance of different alarm points. Additionally, you can filter out alarms with lower
priorities.
333
333
USING RUNTIME
2. In the Disable Alarm Points dialog box, select individual that want to disable, or select Select
All.
3. Click OK.
NOTE: If you re-enable an alarm point, re-enabling will not actually take effect until the current value of
the alarm point changes. If the alarm point is re-enabled while in an alarmed state, this could mean that
an alarm point will not appear in an alarm graphic, and its configured sound may not play.
334
To beginning
Back one screen
Use scrolling controls to move back and forth in a chart of historical data.
To select an active pen, click the drop-down list and select a pen from the names that appear.
If the y-axis scaling was based on pens (see Configuring Y-Axis Parameters on page 197), the
scale of the active pen will be displayed.
To change the scale of an active pen, click the Active pen scaling tool and enter new
minimum and maximum values in the dialog box that appears.
If the y-axis scaling is Logarithmic (see Configuring Y-Axis Parameters on page 197), the pen
Default Min and Default Max values are limited to powers of ten. For example, if you want to
plot a pen in the range of 1 to 50 with a logarithmic SuperTrend, the SuperTrend will calculate
the Default Max value to 100, since that is the smallest factor of 10 greater than 50. If you want
to be able to zoom in on the active pen, use a range such as 110, 0.11, or .00110. If you
want to zoom out, use something like 101000 or 11000.
To see all pens scaled the same when using Pen scaling, select a pen, click the scaling
button (magnifying glass), enter the scale, and hold the SHIFT key down while clicking OK.
SuperTrends are normally set up in Configurator with Pen scaling (see Configuring Y-Axis
Parameters on page 197). But with Pen scaling, when one pen is selected in the display, only
that pen matches the scaling shown; other pens do not appear to be at the correct value. By
holding down the SHIFT key while clicking OK, Default scaling is used so that all pens are scaled
the same.
To revert to Pen scaling (each pen individually scaled), select a pen, click the scaling button
(magnifying glass) and hold the the CTRL key while clicking OK. Nothing needs to be entered
or changed in this dialog. All pens will revert to Pen scaling.
335
335
USING RUNTIME
1. To switch between historical and real-time modes, click the Historical mode button
Real-time mode button
or the
When you switch from Real-time mode to Historical mode, the SuperTrend Historic Log Files
dialog box opens, listing the names of SuperTrend historic log files and the time each log
started and stopped recording.
NOTE: If there are a lot of historic log files, it can take a long time to display the files. To view the files
more quickly, hold down the SHIFT key when you click the Historical mode button. This lists the log files
by name only without the start and end times. You can also speed up the display time by having each
SuperTrend log its files to a different folder. See Saving a SuperTrend Log to a File on page 206.
2. To view SuperTrend historic log files, select one or more files and click OK.
To select multiple log files, hold down either the SHIFT key (for selecting contiguous items) or
the CTRL key (for selecting non-contiguous items) and click a file name.
To open a different SuperTrend log file, click the Browse button and browse to the folder
containing the file.
The information in the log file will be shown in the SuperTrend chart. Use the controls at the
bottom of the chart to view the information. (See Using SuperTrends in Runtime on
page 334.)
3. When you are finished viewing the SuperTrend historic log file, click the Real-time Mode button
to return to the real-time view of SuperTrend information.
Note that you will need to reselect log files each time you switch to historical mode.
336
337
337
USING RUNTIME
such as the setpoint of a PID controlling the AC, an oven temperature or cook time, or the speed of a
conveyer belt. To learn how to modify multiple variables all at once, see Recipes on page 246.
NOTE: You can only use this feature if the table has the Allow Edit feature turned on in PAC Display
Configurator. See Creating a Table on page 135.
To modify an individual table element:
1. Click the table element.
The element is selected and a border appears around the table element.
2. Enter the new value and then press Enter to confirm, or press ESC to cancel.
Once you select an item from the dropdown list, its Operator Driven Dynamic Attributes will be
executed (after verifying Security, if configured).
Any items that have the Text-in attribute are updated in real time when when you click the
drop-down arrow to display the list, and when the item is the item you have selected in the list.
338
B
C
D
E
F
G
(A) Plots. The SuperTrend plots the SetPoint in red, the Input in green, and the Output in blue.
(B) Pen Scale. Click the icon to change the scale of an active pen. In the dialog box that appears,
enter new minimum and maximum values.
(C) Pen Value. Shows the numerical value for the Input, Output, and Setpoint pens. To change a
value, see Changing the PID Values in Runtime below.
(D) Source/Destination. Indicates the source/destination of the field: Host, I / O, or PID.
(E) PID Tuning. Use Gain, Tune I, Tune D, and Scan Rate to tune the PID.
For more information on PID tuning, see form 1700, the PAC Control Users Guide. See also, Opto 22
form 1641, OptoTutorial: SNAP PAC PID, which we highly recommend for detailed information on PIDs
on Ethernet-based I/O units. Both forms are available for download from our website at
www.opto22.com.
(F) Manual/Auto. The PIDViewer starts in its current mode, either auto or manual. Switch to
manual mode by clicking the Man button, or switch to auto mode by clicking the Auto button. A
password will need to be entered if one has been assigned.
(G) Tune/Hide. Click Tune to display the four PID tuning fields (Gain, Tune I, Tune D, and Scan
Rate). Click Hide to hide them. A password will need to be entered if one has been assigned.
339
339
Source/Destination
Input
Output
Setpoint
I/O (PID)
No
Yes
No
Host
No
Yes
Yes
I/O (PID)
No
No
No
Host
No
No
Yes
Manual:
Auto:
The fields update in real-time as the values of the PID change. To manually send a value to the field,
click in the field and enter a new value.
For touchscreen terminals, if Use on-screen keyboard for touchscreens is set in the Configure >
Runtime preferences dialog, an on-screen keyboard will appear for a writable edit field when the
user clicks inside the field. For more information, see the description for Keyboard Setup in Runtime
Setup: General Tab on page 295.
340
A: PAC Display
Troubleshooting
This appendix provides tips and procedures for resolving problems you may encounter while
creating or running your PAC Display project.
If you are having problems with creating a PAC Control strategy, see Appendix A, PAC Control
Troubleshooting, in the PAC Control Users Guide. For information about types of errors and lists of
error messages that may appear in PAC Display Runtime, see "Appendix B: PAC Display Errors.
Error or event messages in PAC Display Runtime appear in the Event Log Viewer as the project runs.
To open the Event Log Viewer window, select View > Event Log. The messages appear along with
other diagnostic information related to your project, as shown in the example below:
341
341
Diagnostic
information from
the control engine.
The time and date of
the event message
appears here.
The error or
event message
appears here.
See "Appendix B: PAC Display Errors for information about error messages that may appear in PAC
Display Runtime.
342
If multiple Bad Quality or Not Connected messages appear when PAC Display Runtime
starts, see Hiding or Displaying Runtime Startup Messages on page 343.
If you are having problems saving project files to your hard drive or other storage location, see
Problems Saving a Project on page 343.
If an on-screen text string object disappears when you run the project, see Making an Empty
String Visible on page 344.
2. Select or deselect the Enable Awaiting Connection Messages checkbox to display or hide any
Bad Quality or Not Connected messages that may occur when the PAC Display project
starts.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your settings.
343
343
For additional information on viewing file properties in Windows, see the documentation from
Microsoft and your computer manufacturer.
3. Double-click on the new graphic object and, in the Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box that
opens, double-click Send String from the Operator Driven Attributes list.
4. In the Dynamic Attributes - Send String dialog box that appears, select Prompt for Data in the
Source group and click OK.
5. Click OK to close the Graphic Dynamic Attributes dialog box and save your changes.
6. Now place the new graphic object behind the text string object as follows:
a. Using the Select tool, select the graphic object and move it until its directly over the text
string object.
b. With the graphic object still selected, choose Edit > Z-Order > Send to Back.
7. Save your project and run it in PAC Display Runtime.
If you click in the area of the text string object and new push button graphic object, the Enter
String dialog box should appear, even if an empty string has been sent to the control engine.
344
CAUTION: Use the Windows Registry Editor carefully. It is strongly recommended that you make a
backup copy of your Windows Registry before continuing with this procedure. Without a backup copy, if
you delete the wrong properties and cannot return the Registry to its original state, application and system
files can become unusable and will have to be reinstalled.
345
345
3. To see more information on any file, double-click its name. To sort the list in a different order,
click any column heading.
4. To e-mail the information to Opto 22 Product Support, click E-mail.
The utility saves the list to a file named Version.bd in the same directory that contains
OptoVersion.exe. If you use Microsoft Outlook as your e-mail program, a new message
automatically appears addressed to Product Support, with the version file attached.
5. If you use Microsoft Outlook, add comments to the new message and click Send.
6. If you use another e-mail program, attach the Version.bd file to an e-mail message and address
the message to [email protected], along with an explanation of the problem youre
experiencing.
346
This appendix lists error messages you may see while running a project in PAC Display Runtime. The
cause of each error message is described, and, if possible, corrective action you can take to resolve
the problem.
Types of Errors
Error Messages in PAC Display Runtime
Types of Errors
While using the Configurator and Runtime components of PAC Display, several types of errors may
occur due to incorrect equipment setup, out-of-date files, or equipment failure. These errors
generally fall into three categories:
Runtime ErrorsThese may occur while running a project in PAC Display Runtime. Most of
these errors can be traced to control engine configuration problems or configuration problems
with the I/O unit(s) connected to the control engine. Runtime errors can be further grouped
into several subcategories based on the type of error that occurs; see Error Messages in PAC
Display Runtime on page 348 for lists of error messages in each subcategory.
Configurator ErrorsThese may occur as you use PAC Display Configurator to create a
project (for instance, adding a dynamic attribute to a graphic object). Errors most commonly
occur when entering data into a dialog box; if an error occurs while doing this, simply re-enter
an appropriate value and continue.
Windows ErrorsThese may occur while using either the Runtime or Configurator
components of PAC Display. The most common Windows errors occur when too many
applications are running at the same time, reducing the amount of memory available for the
operating system. These errors are issued by the Microsoft Windows operating system running
on your computer; see the documentation from Microsoft and your computer manufacturer
for more information about Windows errors.
347
347
See
page 348
page 349
Port Errors
page 349
page 349
page 351
System Errors
page 352
348
Error Message
Possible Causes
The tag name used as a source for a file name could not be used.
The default file name will be used instead. The default file name was
set up in the Configurator.
A directory could not be created. Check if the directory is being created in a read-only directory. Change the protection to allow you to
create it.
A file was being written to a drive, but not enough free space was
available to complete the transaction. Free up some space on the
drive to continue.
The specified directory could not be used. The default directory will
be used instead. The default directory was set up in the Configurator.
Possible Causes
The executable file specified for a launch application setup could not
be found. Verify the directory where the file actually resides.
WinExec error #
Port Errors
The following errors are generated by PAC Display if a port-related error occurred:
Error Message
Possible Causes
Possible Causes
The path configured for the destination file of the uploaded recipe is
invalid. Make sure the drive/directory path is correct.
The path configured for the format file of the uploaded recipe is
invalid. Make sure the drive/directory path is correct.
Could not find the selected recipe format file. Please check to ensure the
file name is correct.
The file name configured for the format file of the uploaded recipe
was not found. Make sure you configured the correct tag name.
349
349
350
Error Message
Possible Causes
An invalid type was specified in the recipe. Only tags of types integer
table, float table, string table, and chart are allowed in a recipe.
A PAC Control tag name was configured to contain the name of the
destination file, but its contents were empty. Make sure you configure
the correct tag name.
A PAC Control tag name was configured to contain the name of the
format file, but its contents were empty. Make sure you configured
the correct tag name.
The recipe upload file does not exist. Verify the spelling of the file.
Make sure the chart state sent in a chart control instruction was Stop,
Suspend, Start, or Continue.
The control engine specified in the recipes PAC Control tag is not
recognized by this project. Verify the control engine name for the tag
name requested. Check the control engines spelling.
The syntax for the PAC Control tag is incorrect. Make sure it follows
this pattern: Control Engine Name:Tag Type.Tagname, where Control Engine Name is the name of the control engine; Tag Type is
Integer Table, Integer 64 Table, Float Table, String Table, or
Chart; and Tagname is the name of a PAC Control tag or chart
name of the type specified in Tag Type.
Check the syntax of the tag value(s) specified for the indices. Make
sure a colon separates the index from the actual value, and also verify that the index is within the tables range.
Possible Causes
Non-specific
Configuration Error
Awaiting Connection
The input is required to be logically connected to something but is not. This may
reflect that no value is currently available, for reasons such as the value not having been provided by the data source.
Device Failure
Sensor Failure
A sensor failure had been detected (the Limits field can provide additional diagnostic information in some situations).
Communications have failed, but the last known value is available. Note that the
age of the value may be determined from the TIMESTAMP in the OPCITEMSTATE.
Comm Failure
Out of Service
The block is off scan or otherwise locked. This quality is also used when the
active state of the item or the group containing the item is InActive.
Whatever was writing this value has stopped doing so. The returned value
should be regarded as stale. Note that this differs from a bad value with Substatus 5 (Last Known Value). That status is associated specifically with a detectable communications error on a fetched value. This error is associated with the
failure of some external source to put something into the value within an
acceptable period of time. Note that the age of the value can be determined
from the TIMESTAMP in OPCITEMSTATE.
351
351
Error Message
Possible Causes
Either the value has reached a sensors minimum or maximum limit (in which
case the limit field should be set to 1 or 2), or the sensor is otherwise known to
be out of calibration via some form of internal diagnostics (in which case the limit
field should be 0).
Engineering Units
Exceeded
The returned value is outside the limits defined for this parameter. Note that in
this case (per the Fieldbus Specification) the Limits field indicates which limit
has been exceeded but does not necessarily imply that the value cannot move
farther out of range.
Sub-Normal
The value is derived from multiple sources and has less than the required number of Good sources.
Local Override
The value has been Overridden. Typically this is means the input has been disconnected and a manually entered value has been 'forced'.
0xC004008
Invalid item ID. An invalid item ID was generated by PAC Display for this tag. Do
the following in PAC Display:
1. Choose Tools > Regenerate IO Scanner Tag Names.
2. Choose Tools > AutoCorrect Tags.
This invalid class string is usually caused by an improperly-installed
OptoOPCServer.
To test this, go to
Start
0x800401F3
> All Programs > Opto22 > OptoOPCServer > Registry Checker.
If any entries in the Value column read "Key not found" or something similar,
then OptoOPCServer is installed improperly.
To correct this problem:
Re-install PAC Project. This is likely to fix it. If it doesnt, open a command
prompt, navigate to the Windows\system32\OptoCom\ folder, and try the next
solution.
If the error is for the first entry (OptoOPC.exe), run this command:
OptoOPC.exe -regserver
For any of the other dlls, if they are located in the OptoCom folder, run this
command:
regsvr32.exe -<dllname>
If it is succesful, a dialog will appear saying "DllRegisterServer succeeded for
<Dll name>"
NOTE: Some of the dlls are located in the Program Files\...\PAC Project X.X
folder. If that is the case, navigate to that folder in the command window and
run the same command.
System Errors
The following error is displayed if a system error occurred:
352
Error Message
Possible Causes
The data returned from the control engine was detected to have a
floating point error. This error could have occurred during data
manipulations at the control engine. Verify that the data has been
handled or cast properly according to its type.
This appendix lists the files used in a PAC Display project, including those created automatically
when a project is saved. Use this information as a reference when you are looking through your PAC
Display files or working directory.
DisplayC.basic.exe
DisplayC.pro.exe
DisplayR.basic.exe
DisplayR.pro.exe
DisplayX.basic.exe
DisplayX.pro.exe
*.$$$
ASCII text file created by PAC Display Configurator using the AutoCorrect Tags
option. The file displays any changes made by the AutoCorrect Tags tools to
tag names in strategies that were incompatible with PAC Display. The file also
lists tag name errors that could not be corrected.
*.alm
*.bin
*.bmp
*.H##
*.idb
Main strategy file from a PAC Control program. Lists all objects and other
global information used in a program, as well as control engine configuration
information.
*.ini
353
353
354
*.ixw
Exported window file created using PAC Display Configurator. Contains all
objects and tags in a specified window in a PAC Display project.
*.uui
*.msg
*.rcp
Recipe file, created by a text editor. Used to send a set of parameters or to read
a set of parameters from a control engine.
*.smb
Symbol file, created by PAC Display Configurator. Symbol files contain graphic
objects and their configured attributes for use in PAC Display projects.
*.T##
*.txt
Dynamic attribute (or tag info) report file, created by PAC Display
Configurator.
*.W####
*.adl
*mpdlin
*pdlinh
*pdlin
Appendix D: D: MenusAppendix D
D: Menus
This section lists in detail the contents of PAC Display menus for both Configurator and Runtime
components:
Note that if a keyboard shortcut is available for a menu command, the shortcut is listed next to the
command in the menu as shown in the example below:
Keyboard
shortcut
Command
Many menu commands can also be accessed by right-clicking on an object or in a window, and
then choosing the command from the pop-up menu that appears.
Configurator Menus
File Menu
New Project. (CTRL+N) Creates a new project. After selecting this menu option, choose a location
and provide a name for the project in the dialog box that appears. See Creating a Project on
page 44.
Open Project. (CTRL+O) Opens an existing project. After selecting this menu option, navigate to
and select the project you want to open in the dialog box that appears. Only one PAC Display
project may be open at a time. See Opening a Project on page 49.
355
355
CONFIGURATOR MENUS
Close Project. Closes the project that is currently open. If the project has been modified, you are
prompted to save changes. See Closing a Project on page 52.
Save Project. (CTRL+S) Saves any modifications to the files for the current project. See Saving a
Project on page 50.
Save Project As. (SHIFT+CTRL+S) Saves any modifications to the current project to a name and
project directory. This menu option is similar to Save Project, except that you can specify a new
name and location for the saved project in the dialog box that appears. This is a good way to make a
copy or a backup version of a project. See Saving a Project on page 50.
You can also copy a PAC Display project to a different computer or drive without using the Save
Project As menu option. To do this, use Archive Project listed below.
Save Project and Load Runtime. Saves the current project and then opens it in PAC Display
Runtime. This is a quick way of switching between Configurator and Runtime when you are
developing a project. See Saving a Project on page 50.
Archive Project. The project is archived to the current project directory with all the files
necessary to transfer the project to another computer. See Archiving a Project on page 51.
Archive Project and Email to Opto 22. The project is archived to the current project
directory with all the files necessary to transfer the project to another computer. The project is
attached automatically to an email addressed to Opto 22 Product Support. In order for Product
Support to better assist you, a message will advise you to use PAC Control to archive the strategy
files to submit along with the PAC Display archive. See Archiving a Project on page 51.
Export Project. Exports the project to a text file, which can be used to compare to another
projects exported text file using a file comparison utility. See Exporting a Project on page 51
Each exported text file is formatted for easy reading and includes all the information about the
project, including windows, graphics, dynamic atributes, alarm points, historic logs, recipes, and so
on.
Project Path. Displays the full directory path to the projects saved location. The projects path is
also displayed in the title bar, but if it is too long to fit there, you can use this command to see the
directory path.
Password Protect Project. Lets you protect your PAC Display project with a password to
prevent others from opening and modifying the project using PAC Display Configurator. The project
can still be opened and run in PAC Display Runtime. See Protecting a Project with a Password on
page 48.
CAUTION: Make sure to keep your password in a safe place. If you forget your password, you will not be able
to open your project in PAC Display Configurator.
356
APPENDIX D: MENUS
Auto Increment Version on SaveSelect this option to have a numbered version of the PAC Display
project file created each time the project is saved.
Search Grouped TagsSelect this option if you want AutoCorrect Tags to search grouped graphics.
You should be aware, however, that when AutoCorrectTags searches groups, the search is more
thorough and errors may be generated that you were not expecting.
See also, Saving Versions of a Project on page 50.
Choose Bitmap. Selects a bitmap file for use in the project. After selecting this menu option, in
the dialog box that appears, navigate to and select the bitmap you want to include in the project.
Use the Bitmap tool to place the selected bitmap in the projects draw window. See Adding a
Graphic on page 19.
Save As Bitmap. Saves the selected graphic(s) as a bitmap. After selecting this menu option, in
the dialog box that appears, specify a file name and location for the new bitmap. If no graphics are
selected, then everything in the draw window is saved to the bitmap file name. Any dynamic
attributes you have configured are not saved with the bitmap. See Saving Objects as Bitmaps on
page 111.
Printer Setup. Selects an available printer and sets its attributes. See Printing Graphics on
page 138.
Print. Prints the contents of any displayed main and draw windows. You can specify the number of
copies to be printed and other options in the Printer Setup command. See Printing Graphics on
page 138.
(Previous File List). The names and directory paths of projects that had been previously opened
in Configurator are listed near the bottom of the File menu.
Exit. Closes the current Configurator windows and exits the application. If you modified the current
project, you will be prompted to save it.
Edit Menu
Undo/Redo. (Available only when you have performed an action that can be undone or redone.)
Reverses an earlier action you have performed, or repeats an action performed earlier. For example,
if you have deleted a graphic object from a window, select Undo to restore the graphic. If, after
restoring the graphic, you decide again to delete it, select Redo to repeat the earlier deletion. You
can undo up to 50 actions.
Cut. (CTRL+X) (Available only when you have selected something.) Copies selected graphics onto
the clipboard and removes them from the draw window. Cutting something replaces anything
stored there previously. See Deleting Objects on page 116.
Copy. (CTRL+C) (Available only when you have selected something.) Copies selected graphics onto
the clipboard without removing them from the draw window. Copying something to the clipboard
replaces anything stored there previously. See Copying, Duplicating, and Pasting on page 111.
357
357
CONFIGURATOR MENUS
Paste. (CTRL+P) (Available only when something has been copied or cut into the clipboard.) Inserts
a copy of the clipboard contents into the middle of the active draw window. See Copying,
Duplicating, and Pasting on page 111.
Delete. (DEL) (Available only when you have selected something.) Removes selected graphic(s)
from a draw window. Unlike the Cut command, Delete removes the selection without placing it in
the clipboard; once you delete something, you cannot retrieve it. See Deleting Objects on
page 116.
Duplicate. (CTRL+D) (Available only when you have selected something.) Creates a duplicate of
the selected graphic(s). The duplicate is placed directly below the selected graphics. Duplicating a
selected graphic does not use the clipboard. See Copying, Duplicating, and Pasting on page 111.
Select All. Selects all the completed graphics in the active draw window. Anything that is not
selected within the active draw window when you use this command may be incomplete.
Incomplete graphics can be erased by using the Redraw command under the View menu. See
Selecting All Objects on page 105.
Replace. Modifies tag names attached to a graphic or graphics. Allows you to link graphics to a
different control engine, item name, table index, or bit index. You can find and replace tags in the
entire project, or just in the selected graphic(s). See Finding and Replacing Tags in a PAC Display
Project on page 82.
Z-Order. (Available only when you have selected something.) As objects are placed in draw
windows, theyre assigned a stacking order (or Z-order) to define which object appears in front of
or in back of another object. See Changing Stacking Order on page 115.
The position of objects in this stacking order can be modified as follows:
Bring to Front(Available only when you have selected something.) Positions the selected
graphics in front of any other objects in the window.
Move Forward(Available only when you have selected something.) Moves the selected
graphics one position forward in the stack.
Send to Back(Available only when you have selected something.) Positions the selected
graphics in back of any other objects in the window.
358
APPENDIX D: MENUS
Move Backward(Available only when you have selected something.) Moves the selected
graphics one position backward in the stack.
Align. (Available only when you have selected more than one object.) Aligns selected objects in a
variety of ways. See Aligning Graphics on page 116.
The following choices are available:
LeftAligns the left edges of the selected graphics. All selected graphics are moved left to
align with the left-most graphic in the group.
Before Left-Align
CenterAligns the vertical centers of the selected graphics. All selected graphics are moved
left or right to align their centers with an imaginary vertical line down the center of the
selected graphics.
Before Center-Align
After Center-Align
RightAligns the right edges of the selected graphics. All selected graphics are moved right
to align with the right-most graphic in the group.
Before Right-Align
After Left-Align
After Right-Align
TopAligns the top edges of the selected graphics. All selected graphics are moved up to
align with the top-most graphic in the group.
359
359
CONFIGURATOR MENUS
Before Top-Align
MiddleAligns the horizontal centers of the selected graphics. All selected graphics are
moved up or down to align their centers with an imaginary horizontal line running across the
center of the selected graphics.
Before Middle-Align
360
After
After Middle-Align
BottomAligns the bottom edges of the selected graphics. All selected graphics are moved
down to align with the bottom-most graphic in the group.
Before Bottom-Align
After Top-Align
APPENDIX D: MENUS
Size. When multiple graphics are selected, they can be resized equally so that all the graphics have
the same height and width. See Resizing Multiple Graphics to Equal Dimensions on page 113.
The following choices are available:
Grow to Largest HeightAll selected objects are resized to the height of the tallest object
selected.
Grow to Largest WidthAll selected objects are resized to the width of the widest object
selected.
Shrink to Smallest HeightAll selected objects are resized to the height of the smallest
object selected.
Shrink to Smallest WidthAll selected objects are resized to the width of the least wide
object selected.
Flip/Rotate. (Available only when you have selected one or more objects.) Changes the
orientation and rotation of objects. See Rotating Objects on page 117.
Flip HorizontalRemoves selected graphics and replaces them with mirror images of the
graphics flipped over a vertical center point. Text, trends, bitmaps, and metafiles have their
positions changed but are not mirrored.
Flip VerticalRemoves selected graphics and replaces them with mirror images of the
graphics flipped over a horizontal center point. Text, trends, bitmaps, and metafiles have their
positions changed but are not mirrored.
361
361
CONFIGURATOR MENUS
Rotate each object individually rotates each object the specified number of degrees
aroundits own center.
362
APPENDIX D: MENUS
Rotate all objects around center of group rotates each object around the center point of all
the selected objects.
Unrotated objects
Group. (Available only when you have selected more than one object.) Gathers any combination
of two or more graphics into a single graphic object. You can then select the object, move it, size it,
or assign dynamic attributes to it as a single entity. In Runtime, only the dynamic attributes assigned
to the grouped object are processed; any dynamic attributes assigned to individual objects that
make up the group are ignored, including trends. See Grouping and Locking Graphics on
page 106.
Ungroup. (Available only when you have selected a grouped object.) Splits a graphics object on
which the Group command has been used into its original individual components. This allows each
graphic object to be individually selected. If any of the graphics had individual dynamic attributes
prior to grouping, those dynamic attributes will be restored, and then configured and processed at
Runtime. See Grouping and Locking Graphics on page 106.
Copy to File. (Available only when you have something selected.) Saves the selected object(s) to
a file and saves any dynamic attributes youve assigned to the object(s). Specify the file name,
location, and file format when prompted. The default file name extension is .smb.
Save Metafile As. (Available only when you have a metafile graphic selected.) Saves a selected
Windows metafile graphic to a file. Specify the file name, location, and file format when prompted.
You can save the selected metafile graphic to the Windows Metafile (WMF) format or to the
Enhanced Metafile (EMF) format. Windows metafiles have the file name extensions .wmf and .emf.
Paste from File. Retrieves graphics from a file or from an included library of industrial graphics.
See Importing a Metafile, JPEG, or PNG Graphic on page 109.
You can select a graphic using the following menu commands:
Built-in symbolsSelect this to choose a graphic that has been saved as a PAC Display
symbol file. A dialog box prompts you for the file name, location, and file format of the file
363
363
CONFIGURATOR MENUS
youd like to open. (Symbol files have the file extension .smb.) Click the Open button to
import the selected graphic.
Symbol FactorySelect this to choose a graphic from a large library of graphics
designed for industrial applications. These graphics are in Windows metafile (WMF) and
other file formats. When the Symbol Factory window opens, browse through the
categories and thumbnails provided to find an appropriate graphic, and then double-click
the graphic to copy it to the Windows clipboard. (Another way to copy a graphic in the
Symbol Factory is to select it and click the Copy button.)
Now click on the PAC Display project draw window to make it active, and then select Paste
from the Edit menu to add the copied graphic to the window. (You can also paste the
graphic by pressing CTRL+V on the keyboard, or by right-clicking and selecting Paste from
the pop-up menu.)
Import metafileSelect this to choose a graphic that has been saved in either WMF or
EMF (Enhanced Metafile) format. A dialog box prompts you for the file name, location, and
file format of the file youd like to open. (Metafiles have the file extensions .wmf and .emf.)
Click the Open button to import the selected graphic.You are asked to navigate to and
select an appropriate file.
Import JPEGSelect this to choose a graphic that has been saved in either JPEG format.
A dialog box prompts you for the file name, location, and file format of the file youd like to
open. (JPEG files have the file extensions .jpg.) Click the Open button to import the
selected graphic. You are asked to navigate to and select an appropriate file.
Import GIFSelect this to choose a graphic that has been saved in either GIF format. A
dialog box prompts you for the file name, location, and file format of the file youd like to
open. (GIF files have the file extensions .gif.) Click the Open button to import the selected
graphic. You are asked to navigate to and select an appropriate file. GIF graphics behave
differently than JPEG graphics in PAC Display. For more information, see Importing a GIF
Graphic on page 110.
Import PNGSelect this to choose a graphic that has been saved in either PNG format. A
dialog box prompts you for the file name, location, and file format of the file youd like to
open. (PNG files have the file extensions .png.) Click the Open button to import the
selected graphic. You are asked to navigate to and select an appropriate file.
Edit Dynamic Attributes. (Available only when you have something selected.) Connects a
graphic to a PAC Control data item. See Assigning a Dynamic Attribute to a Graphic on page 140.
After selecting this menu option, all applicable dynamic attributes are shown in the dialog box that
opens. Select input dynamic attributes or output dynamic attributes when prompted. For example,
you can set up connections so the value of a PAC Control tag changes the color and fill size of a
graphic. With output dynamic attributes, you can change the value of a tag as you slide the
graphic on the screen.
Many different combinations of dynamic attributes are possible, and different dialog boxes are used
to assign dynamic attributes to a graphic. For example, when a trend is selected, the Trend
Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Copy Dynamic Attributes. (SHIFT+CTRL+C) (Available only when you have a single graphic
selected and a control engine is configured.) Creates and stores in the clipboard a copy of the
selected graphics dynamic attributes. See Copying and Deleting Dynamic Attributes on page 181.
364
APPENDIX D: MENUS
Paste Dynamic Attributes. (Available only when you have something selected and have
previously copied dynamic attributes to the clipboard.) Assigns copied dynamic attributes to a
graphic. You can paste dynamic attributes to one or more selected graphics. You can delete existing
attributes, or replace or ignore any duplicate attributes. See Copying and Deleting Dynamic
Attributes on page 181.
Delete Dynamic Attributes. (Available only when you have something selected.) Removes
dynamic attributes of a selected graphic. You can delete the dynamic attributes of more than one
selected graphic. See Copying and Deleting Dynamic Attributes on page 181.
Edit Text. (Available only when you have a text object selected.) Changes text in a text object.
Select the text with the Select tool, choose this menu item, and then edit the text in the dialog box
that appears. See Working with Text on page 119.
Edit Points. (Available only when you have a polygon, polyline, or Bezier curve selected.) Changes
individual points in a polygon, polyline, or Bezier curve. Select the object with the Select tool,
choose this menu item, and then click and move individual points on the object. See Reshaping
Graphics on page 115.
Lock/Unlock Position. (Available only when you have something selected.) Locks the position
of one or more items in a draw window. See Grouping and Locking Graphics on page 106.
View Menu
Hide Menu Bar. Hides the menu bar. The ESC key toggles the menu bar on and off. See Hiding
the Menu Bar on page 39.
Hide/Show Toolbox. (CTRL+T) Hides or displays the Toolbox. The Toolbox shows the tools you
need to create a project in PAC Display Configurator. If the Toolbox is hidden, the Show Toolbox
command is displayed in this menu. See Configurator Toolbox on page 37.
Configure Grid. Displays a Grid dialog box that prompts you to toggle on or off both the Grid
and the Snap On feature. Grids can aid your work in the draw window. You can also enter a Grid size
in the Grains/Units area of the dialog box. The Grid size refers to the spacing of Grid points,
measured in pixels. For example, a Grid size of 10 means a grid point will appear every 10 pixels.
Sometimes grids do not appear because the grid size is too big for the draw window. You cannot
display the Grid without specifying a Grid size first.
Hide/Show Grid. (The Grid must first be displayed using the Grids menu item.) Hides or shows
the Grid. If the Grid is hidden, the Show Grid command is displayed.
Turn Snap On/Off. (The Grid must first be displayed using the Grids menu item. Also activate
the Snap On feature in the same dialog box.) Toggles the Snap On feature on or off. Snap On cannot
work without an active Grid. If Snap On is enabled, the Turn Snap Off command is shown.
Redraw. Redraws the contents of the active draw window. Incomplete graphics (such as an
incomplete polygon) in the draw window are removed when you select this command. See
Redrawing an Active Draw Window on page 38.
365
365
CONFIGURATOR MENUS
Reset Dialog Positions. Resets the following dialogs to appear in the middle of the active
display window: Alarm Points, Application Managers, Control Engines, Historic Logs, Event Log
Viewer, Sounds, and Window Managers. This can help you find a dialog that you think should be
open.
Dynamic Attributes. Generates a text file listing the dynamic attributes of objects in one or
more draw windows. This report also lists the configured alarm points in the PAC Display project.
The text file can be analyzed with the next command, Launch TagInfo View Utility. See Viewing
Tags for One or More Objects on page 182.
Launch TagInfoView Utility. Starts a small utility program that lets you sort the order in which
tags in the PAC Display project are displayed. See Using the TagInfoView Utility Program on
page 183.
Find Tag. Used to locate specific tags used in a PAC Display project. See Searching for Tags in a
PAC Display Project on page 81.
Decrypt Runtime Operator Log File. Starts a small utility program that decrypts encrypted
Runtime Operator Log files.
Style Menu
Use the Style Menu to control the drawing attributes of the graphic tools. Whenever a graphic such
as a line or rectangle is drawn, the selected style attributes are applied. Combining different style
settings allows you to draw an almost infinite variety of graphics. Text attributes, including font style,
color, and size, are assigned in the Text menu.
NOTE: Trends and bitmaps are not affected by style settings.
Line Color. Presents a color palette you can use to assign or change the line color of the selected
graphic. If no graphic is selected, the color you choose is set as the default and is then applied as the
line color to all graphics you subsequently draw. See Applying or Changing Line Attributes on
page 107.
Line Width. Assigns or changes the line width of the selected graphic. Line widths are shown in
pixels. If no graphic is selected, the line width you choose is set as the default and is then applied to
all graphics you subsequently draw. See Applying or Changing Line Attributes on page 107.
Line Style. Assigns or changes the line style of the selected graphic. If no graphic is selected, the
line style you choose is applied to all graphics you subsequently draw. Line styles other than solid
apply only to objects with a line width of 1. Line widths greater than 1 are always solid. The Invisible
line style is used with rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, and polygons. If these objects are drawn
366
APPENDIX D: MENUS
with the invisible line style, the border line around the object is not displayed; in order to see them,
you must apply a fill. See Applying or Changing Line Attributes on page 107.
Fill Color. Assigns or changes the fill color of the selected graphic. If no graphic is selected, the fill
color you choose is applied to all graphics you subsequently draw. Fill colors only affect rectangles,
round rectangles, ellipses, and polygons. See Applying or Changing Fill Attributes on page 108.
Background Color. Assigns or changes the color used behind the fill pattern of the selected
graphic. If no graphic is selected, the background color you choose is applied to the fill pattern of all
graphics you subsequently draw. Background colors for fill patterns only affect rectangles, round
rectangles, ellipses, and polygons. See Applying or Changing Fill Attributes on page 108.
Fill Pattern. Assigns or changes the fill pattern of the selected graphic. If no graphic is selected,
the fill pattern you choose is applied to all graphics you subsequently draw. See Applying or
Changing Fill Attributes on page 108.
Fill patterns only affect rectangles, round rectangles, ellipses, and polygons. If you select a Fill Pattern
and your selected objects still remain unfilled, it may be that the Fill Color is set to white (or a color
equal to its background), or that the Fill Pattern is set to Invisible. Also, you cannot apply more than
one Fill Pattern to any graphic. This includes using a Percent fill, which fills an object with a
percentage of black, creating levels of gray.
367
367
CONFIGURATOR MENUS
Opaque. Determines how non-solid primary graphics, such as dotted and dashed lines, interact
with overlapping graphics and background colors. When the opaque style is set, overlapped
graphics and background colors are overwritten. See Applying or Changing Line Attributes on
page 107.
Transparent. The opposite of Opaque, Transparent also determines how non-solid primary
graphics, such as dotted and dashed lines, interact with overlapping graphics and background
colors. When the transparent style is set, overlapped graphics and background colors are
overwritten only by the solid portion of the line. See Applying or Changing Line Attributes on
page 107.
Text Menu
The Text menu items allow you to control text attributes. Text attributes may be set before the text is
placed in the draw window, or changed after it is placed. Style attributes selected from the Style
menu do not affect text. See Formatting Text on page 119.
Font. Assigns or changes the font of the selected text. If no text is selected, the font you choose is
set as the default and is then used for all text you subsequently place.
PAC Display supports all TrueType fonts, as well as the ones shown below:
Size. Assigns or changes the size of the selected text. If no text is selected, the size you choose is set
as the default and is then used for all text you subsequently place. Specify the size of the text in
points; any value between 5 and 500 may be used.
368
APPENDIX D: MENUS
Color. Assigns or changes the color of the selected text. If no text is selected, the color you choose
is applied to all text you subsequently place. PAC Display also supports custom color creation.
Background. Assigns or changes the background color of the selected text. If no text is selected,
the background color you choose is applied to all text you subsequently place. Background colors
only apply to opaque text; transparent text is not affected by this setting.
Text Style. Assigns or changes the style of the selected text. If no text is selected, the style you
choose is applied to all text you subsequently place. PAC Display supports normal, bold, italics,
underline, and strikeout text styles. You can apply multiple styles to text. For instance, you can apply
both bold and italics to any text.
Opaque. Determines how text appears when overlapping other objects. Opaque style is applied
to text just like any other style. If the text is set to Opaque, objects under the text will be overwritten
by the text background color.
Transparent. Determines how text appears when overlapping other objects. The opposite of
opaque, if the text is set to transparent, objects under the text will remain visible and unaffected by
the text background color.
369
369
CONFIGURATOR MENUS
Configure Menu
Control Engine(s). Selects which PAC Control strategy (or strategies) are used for this project.
The PAC Display Configurator uses the tag database from the strategy to connect the appropriate
PAC Control data item to the dynamic attribute of a dynamic object. The control engine Properties
dialog box prompts for the PAC Control strategy. If a PAC Control strategy is not configured for this
project, dynamic attributes cannot be assigned to any dynamic objects. See Configuring Control
Engines on page 62.
Refresh Times. Changes the scan time for a refresh time group. The Refresh Time dialog box
prompts you for the new times. See Configuring Scan Rates on page 184 for more information
about configuring refresh times.
Alarm Points. Displays all configured alarm points by user-specified names. This dialog box also
allows you to add, modify, or delete alarm points. See Configuring Alarm Points on page 261.
Alarming Setup. Configures alarming features. The Options page sets up various Runtime
options, the Logging page sets up file and printer logging, and the Sound page sets up sound
functions. See Configuring Project Alarms on page 283 for more information.
Historic Data Log. Creates historic logs. An Historic Log List dialog box is displayed and lists the
historic log files that have been created. This command allows you to modify which points are
recorded and how frequently data is logged to the files. See Configuring an Historic Data Log on
page 221 for more information about historic data logs.
Event Log. Records a message caused by an event which can be configured to log to a disk file.
You can change parameters such as the number of messages saved, the delimiter used between
messages, and the file rollover period. File name extensions are .msg. The number of files retained
on disk for an event log is also set within the dialog box. When the limit is reached during Runtime,
the file with the oldest time stamp is deleted. See Using the Event Log Viewer on page 326.
SuperTrend Remote Logging. If the same PAC Display project is running on more than one
computer, this menu item selects the local or networked computer that will save SuperTrend data.
See Choosing a Computer to Save SuperTrend Log Files on page 205.
Applications. Adds or modifies application managers for use in the project. The Application
Manager List dialog box displays available application managers for the project. The Application
Manager Configuration dialog box lets you select the program file, working directory, launch
options, initial display view, and trigger for the application manager. See Launching Applications
on page 238 for more information about launching applications based on a trigger.
Recipes. Configures download or upload of recipes to a control engine by a trigger. This method of
recipe management does not require a graphic to be selected during Runtime for the recipe action
to occur. See Configuring a Recipe Download on page 256 and Configuring a Recipe Upload on
page 257 for more information about trigger-based recipe uploads and downloads.
Snapshots. Captures the whole screen and saves it as a bitmap file. You can use snapshots to
review what occurred in Runtime over a period of time, or to capture a triggered event. Snapshots
370
APPENDIX D: MENUS
are taken according to a time interval that you configure. You can use triggers to start and stop the
process. See Configuring Screen Snapshots on page 54.
Sounds. Selects sounds and assigns their trigger for use in the project. The Sounds dialog box lists
the available sounds for the project. The Sound Configuration dialog box lets you configure start and
stop triggers with the Trigger dialog box. The Sound Configuration dialog box also prompts you for
the sound file. See Configuring a Sound on page 243 for more information about triggering
sounds.
Window State. Adds or makes changes to existing window managers. The Window Manager List
dialog box displays all currently configured window managers and allows access to the Window
Manager Configuration dialog box. The Window Manager Configuration dialog box allows you to
change triggers with the Window Manager Start Trigger dialog box and control the draw window
visual state with the Pop Window dialog box. See Configuring Trigger-Based Window States on
page 244 for more information about trigger-based window states.
Scanner Location. (Basic only) Allows you to use a remote computer running OptoOPCServer as
a scanner. And, you can set the Scanner Heartbeat Check Interval, the interval in seconds at which
PAC Display will check to see if the scanner is operating. Select the Enable Awaiting Connection
Messages checkbox to display all startup messages. See Configuring the Scanner on page 68.
Scanner Defaults. (Pro only) Opens a dialog to allow you to set the Scanner Heartbeat Check
Interval, the interval in seconds at which PAC Display will check to see if the scanner is operating.
Select the Enable Awaiting Connection Messages checkbox to display all startup messages. See
Configuring the Scanner on page 68.
Secondary Scanner Location. (Pro only) Opens a dialog to allow you set up a secondary
scanner that will be used when the primary scanner is not available. See Configuring a Remote
Scanner in PAC Display Pro on page 70.
ODBC Data Source. (Pro only) Opens a dialog that allows you to select an ODBC database that
you can use to log SuperTrend, Historic Log, and Runtime Operator Logging data files. Currently
supported dabases are MySQL, MS Access, MS SQLServer. In order to use this feature, the database
must already have been created, and the ODBC connector must be configured. See Configuring an
ODBC Data Source on page 58.
Runtime. Opens a configuration dialog for setting up the PAC Display Runtime session, including
appearance, security configuration, and much more. Using PAC Display Configurator, you can
specify which windows are open or closed, whether the menu is displayed, and whether or not the
operator can exit the program. You can also customize options for the Event Log Viewer, a window
that displays messages about the status and other characteristics of a PAC Display project. And you
can control whether a PAC Display project gathers I/O unit information, such as I/O point states and
values, from tags on a control engine or directly from an I/O unit itself. For more information, Using
the Runtime Setup Dialog Box on page 294.
371
371
CONFIGURATOR MENUS
Tools Menu
AutoCorrect Tags. Run this tool when you first configure a strategy for your project and after
making changes to your project. The tool verifies tag names from a strategy for compatibility with
PAC Display and changes the tag names where necessary. The tool creates a text file with the file
extension .$$$ that summarizes the changes that were made by the tool to any tag names. Refer to
Correcting Tags from a Strategy on page 84 for more information about this command.
Regenerate IO Scanner Tag Names. Use this option when an invalid item ID was generated
by PAC Display for a tag (error 0xC004008). Then choose Tools > AutoCorrect Tags. See Scanner
Errors (Quality Errors) on page 351 (error 0xC004008).
Create Recipe File. Opens the Create Recipe File dialog box for creating either recipe download
file or a recipe upload template. For more information, see Creating a Recipe Download File on
page 246 and Creating a Recipe Upload Template on page 248.
Edit Recipe File. Allows you to edit an existing recipe file. See Editing a Recipe Download File
on page 251.
Validate Recipe File. Validates the format of a recipe file, including the structure, tags, and index
values. See Validating the Format of a Recipe File on page 251.
Convert SuperTrend Files. Converts a supertrend either from text to binary format, or from
binary to text format. See Converting a SuperTrend Log File for Viewing on page 212.
Window Menu
PAC Display Configurator allows you to configure several draw windows per project. The Window
menu items control the number and properties of each draw window in a project. You can create
draw windows, delete draw windows, copy draw windows, and change properties of existing draw
windows.
New
Creates a new draw or URL (Pro only) window and adds it to your project. You can specify the new
windows name, size, behavior, and other attributes. You must provide a unique name for each draw
window. See Creating and Deleting Windows on page 94.
Open
Opens draw and URL (Pro only) windows that are configured but are currently closed. Select which
window to open from a list of all draw that are closed. Windows that are open when a project is
saved are open when the project is started at Runtime. This can be modified using the Configure >
Runtime menu command. See Creating and Deleting Windows on page 94.
Close. Closes draw and URL (Pro only) windows that are currently open. Select which window to
close from a list of all windows that are open. Windows that are closed when a project is saved are
closed when the project is started at Runtime. This can be modified by using the Configure >
Runtime menu command.
372
APPENDIX D: MENUS
Copy. Duplicates the active draw window. You must enter a unique name for the duplicate and
specify any properties you wish to change. All graphics and their connections in the copied window
remain the same in the new copy. See Creating and Deleting Windows on page 94.
Delete. Removes the active draw window from the project. All graphics and their connections in
the active draw window are also deleted. Use caution since deleted draw windows cannot be
recovered. See Creating and Deleting Windows on page 94.
Properties. Modifies the properties of the active draw window. You can change the windows
name, size, behavior, position, color, and other attributes. See Modifying Draw or URL Windows on
page 95.
Export/Import Window. A PAC Display window can be exported from one project, saved as a
file, and then imported into another PAC Display project. The exported window file contains all the
objects and tags that were in the original window. Exporting and importing draw windows is a
convenient way to reuse the same window in different PAC Display projects. See Importing,
Exporting, and Saving Windows on page 98.
(Open Window List). Displays at the bottom of the Window menu the names of up to nine
currently open or iconified windows. Select a draw windows name from this list to display that draw
window and bring it to the front. If more than nine windows are open, a menu item named More
Windows is added, which you can use to select a windows name from a list to display it. A window
must be open or iconified to be listed.
Help Menu
Contents and Index. Starts Help and displays help topics for PAC Display Configurator.
Manuals. Opens the online version of the PAC Display Users Guide. This document is in Adobe pdf
format, and the Adobe Reader application is required to view it.
Opto 22 on the Web. Lists useful links to information on the Opto 22 website. Your PC must
have an installed Web browser and be connected to the Internet to access these links.
About PAC Display Configurator. Displays version information about PAC Display
Configurator.
Runtime Menus
Runtime menus provide access to the Runtime commands. These commands allow you to open
and close projects, view the event log, and view the control engine configurations.
373
373
RUNTIME MENUS
File Menu
Open Project. Loads an existing project created in PAC Display Configurator. You must navigate
to and select the project you want to open. Scanning and animation begin immediately once the
project is loaded. See Opening a Project in Runtime on page 322.
Project Path. Displays the projects full directory path. You can also see the projects path
displayed in the title bar, but if its too long to fit there, you can use this command.
View Menu
Hide Menu Bar. Hides the menu bar. The ESC key toggles the menu bar on and off.
Event Log. Displays the Runtime system event log. This log contains system errors and messages
received during Runtime. The list box contains the most recent system event messages generated
by PAC Display. Each message consists of a date and time stamp, and message text. The message
text describes events such as communications and I/O errors. Use the scroll bar to view prior
messages. If the text of the message is too wide to completely fit in the list box area, you can
double-click the message to display it all. See Using the Event Log Viewer on page 326.
Configuration Status. (Pro only) Opens a dialog that allows you to view and change the
control engines and I/O units configured for the PAC Display project, or to view and change the
status of scanners used in the PAC Display project. See Viewing and Changing Control Engines on
page 326 and Viewing and Changing Scanner Status on page 328.
Sync Control Engine Time to PC. Synchronizes the control engine clocks with the clock on
the PC used to sync the control engines clock. To choose which PC to use to sync the control
engines clock, see Runtime Setup: Control Engine Tab on page 299. See also,Using the Event Log
Viewer on page 326.
Alarm Menu
Modify Alarm Points. Allows the operator to change parameters for alarm points in the PAC
Display project if it has been configured to let the operator do so. See Modifying Alarm Points on
page 331. Also see Configuring Alarm Points on page 261 to learn more about configuring alarm
points.
Alarm point settings can be changed in each one of the five alarm ranges available: HiHi, Hi, Normal,
Lo, and LoLo. Each alarm point state has a value that defines its range.
374
APPENDIX D: MENUS
Alarms Enabled. Disables alarming, including all alarm graphics, sound, and logging. This can be
useful when starting or stopping a process during which alarm conditions may be expected to
happen. This menu item can be initially enabled or disabled through the Alarming Setup dialog box
in the Configurator. See Configuring Project Alarms on page 283. It can also be permanently
grayed out and made inaccessible by unchecking the Alarms Enabled menu item option in the
Alarming Setup dialog box. This option toggles alarms between enabled and disabled. A check
mark next to Alarms Enabled indicates that alarms are enabled. No check mark indicates that alarms
are not enabled.
Disable Alarm Points. Opens a dialog box that allows you to select individual alarm points to
disable for the current Runtime session only. This is not a persistent option. Disabling an alarm point
takes effect after any current processing is being performed on the selected alarm point. See
Disabling Alarm Points in Runtime on page 333.
NOTE: Re-enabling an alarm point will not take effect until the current value of the alarm point changes.
If the alarm point is re-enabled while in an alarmed state, this could mean that an alarm point will not
appear in an alarm graphic, and its configured sound may not play.
Priority Filter. The priority filter level menu items can be used to accept only those alarm points
with a certain priority level. For example, during a startup or shutdown procedure, you may wish to
receive only the most serious alarms. The priority for each alarm point is configured in the Alarm
Point dialog box in the Configurator. See Configuring Project Alarms on page 283.
View Alarm Point Details. Lists the configured alarm points and their details.
Security
Log Out of PAC Display Runtime. If multiple users have been configured in Configurator, you
can log out of Runtime to allow another user to log in. See Logging Out of and In to Runtime on
page 322.
Change Login Password. Opens a dialog box for the currently logged-in user to change his or
her password.
Operator Driven Attribute Access. If global users are configured , a configured user can log
in and access any security-configured operator driven dynamic attribute. See Adding Global
Operator Driven Permissions on page 311).
375
375
RUNTIME MENUS
Add/Modify User. Add, modify, or delete a user name in the list of users allowed to log in to
Runtime. See Modifying List of Users in Runtime on page 307.
Tools
Convert SuperTrend Files. Converts a supertrend either from text to binary format, or from
binary to text format. See Converting SuperTrend Log Files to Text Format for Viewing on page 211.
Window Menu
Open. Opens any Runtime window that is currently closed. An Open Window dialog box displays a
list of closed windows from which you can select the window to open.
Close. Opens the Close Window dialog box. Use this dialog box to close windows. All currently
open and iconified windows are listed and any number of them may be selected for closing. If
windows are closed in PAC Display Runtime, any scanning of tag values associated with the
windows ceases until the window is opened again.
Switch Control Engines. Use to connect to different control engines running the same PAC
Control strategy. Select one or more project windows and then select a control engine. All objects
with dynamic attributes will now use tag values from that control engine. See Switching a Window
between Control Engines on page 329 for more information.
(Open Window List). Displays currently open or iconified windows. Up to nine window names
are displayed. Select a windows name from this list to display that draw window and bring it to the
front. If more than nine windows are open, a menu item named More Windows is added; use More
Windows to select a windows name from a list to display it. A window must be open or iconified for
it to be listed.
Help Menu
Contents and Index
Starts Help and displays help topics for PAC Display Runtime.
Manuals. Opens the online version of the PAC Display Users Guide. This document is in Adobe pdf
format, and the Adobe Reader application is required to view it.
Opto 22 on the Web. Lists useful links to information on the Opto 22 website. Your PC must
have an installed Web browser and be connected to the Internet to access these links.
About PAC Display Runtime. Displays version information about PAC Display Runtime.
376
E: International Characters
PAC Display and the Tag Information Viewer both support international characters. International
characters can be used in the following PAC Display items:
Window names
Table control
Recipe managers
Window managers
Application managers
XY plot titles
377
377
EXAMPLES
Examples
Text tool
objects
Table description
Window names
378
A
acknowledging alarms, 272
activating recipe files, 256
active address, 68
Add/Modify User menu item, 307, 376
adding
alarm, 261
control engine, 62
graphic object, 100
historic data log, 221
sounds, 243
alarm point
disabling in Runtime, 333
dynamic attritutes, 152
send email, 285
Alarm Points menu item, 262, 370
Alarming Setup menu item, 283, 370
alarms
acknowledging, 272
adding, 261
configuring alarm points, 261
configuring for entire project, 370
configuring individually, 370, 375
deleting alarm points, 261
disabling, 375
displaying comments for operator, 276, 277
graphic objects, 279, 281
hot keys, 282
logging options, 288
modifying in PAC DisplayRuntime, 331
notification, 272
printing log, 288
silencing, 331
sounds, 291
viewing in PAC Display Runtime, 330
Alarms Enabled menu item, 375
alert window, 287
51, 356
Archive Project menu item, 356
Archive Project or File menu item, 51
AutoCorrect Tags, 84, 372
results file, 86
AutoCorrect Tags menu item, 85, 372
B
Background Color menu item, 108, 367
Background menu item, 119, 369
batch (.BAT) file
starting project from, 53
batch (.BAT) file, using for startup, 53
bitmap graphic
importing, 108
saving graphic object as, 111
C
change appearance of combo box, 129
Change Font menu item, 129
Change Login Password menu item, 375
changing
control engine properties, 62
PID values in Runtime, 340
size of graphic objects, 112
379
379
tagnames, 358
window state, 244
chart states
assigning to a graphic, 143
recipe download file, 254
Choose Bitmap menu item, 20, 357
Close menu item (Configurator), 372
Close menu item (Runtime), 376
Close Project menu item, 52, 356
closing
project, 52
Color menu item, 119, 369
combining projects, 57
combo box, 124
changing the appearance, 129
using in Runtime, 338
communication
Ethernet link redundancy, 67
with I/O unit or control engine, 320
comparing projects, 51
Configuration Status menu item, 326, 328, 374
Configurator, 124
Configurator Options menu item, 51, 356
Configure Grid menu item, 365
configuring
basic trends, 192
control engine, 62
date format, 297
historic data log, 370
hot keys, 141
no control engine, 87
on-screen keyboard, 296
scanner, 68
security settings, 148
snapshots, 54
sounds, 243
SuperTrends, 195, 201
tags, 75, 78
tags for high-density digital modules, 77
window states, 244
XY plots, 214
control engine
adding to project, 62
checking communications with, 342
communicating with, 320
configuring, 62
configuring without, 87
optimizing communications with, 183
retrieving text from, 172
switching between, 97, 329
Control Engine menu item, 62, 370
380
376
converting SuperTrend log files, 211, 337
Copy Dynamic Attributes menu item, 181, 364
Copy menu item, 94, 111, 357, 373
Copy to File menu item, 363
copying
dynamic attributes, 181
graphic objects, 111
project files, 356
security attributes, 151
correcting tags from a strategy, 84
Create Recipe File menu item, 246, 248, 372
creating
basic trend, 188
project, 44
SuperTrend, 193
Cut menu item, 116, 357
D
data logs, 236
date, setting format of, 297
Decrypt Runtime Operator Log File menu item,
366
Delete Dynamic Attributes menu item, 182, 365
Delete menu item, 94, 116, 358, 373
deleting
alarm points, 261
dynamic attributes, 182
graphic objects, 116
designing a PAC Display project, 33
direct communication with I/O unit, 320
Disable Alarm Points menu item, 333, 375
displaying alarm comments to operator, 276, 277
download recipe file, 246, 251, 253
chart states, 254
dynamic attritutes, 154
to a control engine, 154
downloading
OptoControl strategy, 26
PAC Control strategy using PAC Term, 26
downloading recipe file
to a control engine, 256
draw window
closing, 98
creating, 94
definition, 32
deleting, 94
modifying, 95
opening, 98
using in project, 93
drawing tools, 37, 100, 365
Duplicate menu item, 112, 358
dynamic attributes, 151
alarm point, 152
assigning a chart state, 143
assigning to graphic object, 139, 364
control engine status, 153
controller-driven, 139
copying, 181
deleting, 182
download recipe, 154
Execute menu item, 156
fill color, 157
granting or denying operator use of, 148
horizontal position, 159
horizontal size, 160
horizontal slider, 161
launch application, 162
line color, 163
multiple, 146
operator-driven, 140
operator-driven sub-attributes, 146
pasting, 182
read and clear, 165
rotate, 166
send discrete, 167
send string, 168
send value, 169
text color, 170
text in, 172
upload recipe, 173
vertical position, 175
vertical size, 176
vertical slider, 178
viewing, 182, 366
visibility/blink, 179
windows, 180
Dynamic Attributes menu item, 182, 366
E
Edit Dynamic Attributes menu item, 140, 364
Edit Points menu item, 115, 365
Edit Recipe File menu item, 251, 372
Edit Text menu item, 119, 365
email for alarm points, 285
errors
error messages, 341, 347
Event Log, 318, 370, 374
Event Log Viewer, 40, 313, 326
Ethernet link redundancy, 67
Event Log, 318, 370, 374
menu item
Configurator, 370
Runtime, 326, 374
Viewer, 40, 313, 326
definition, 32
Execute menu item
dynamic attritutes, 156
Exit PAC Display Runtime menu item, 374
export
alarm points, 265
graphic objects, 111
historic logs, 229
Export Project menu item, 52, 356
Export Window menu item, 98, 373
F
fill color
dynamic attritutes, 157
Fill Color menu item, 108, 367
Fill Pattern menu item, 108, 367
Find Tag menu item, 81, 366
finding and replacing tags, 82
finding tags, 81
Flip menu item, 361
Flip/Rotate menu item, 117
Font menu item, 119, 368
G
GIF graphic
importing, 110
global operator driven access, 306, 309
Global Operator Driven Permissions, 311
graphic objects
alarms, 279, 281
aligning, 116, 359
and Symbol Factory, 108, 110
assigning dynamic attributes to, 364
changing size, 37, 112
copying, 111
deleting, 116
drawing, 100
exporting, 111
381
381
H
hardware requirements, 4
heartbeat interval
setting, 73
help
error messages, list of, 348
online, 3
Opto 22 Product Support, 3
Product Support, 3
See also troubleshooting, 341
Hide Grid menu item, 365
Hide Menu Bar menu item, 39, 365
Hide Toolbox menu item, 37, 365
Hint button, 140
hint text, 145
historic data log
configuring a database, 224
Historic Data Log menu item, 221, 370
historic data logs
adding, 221
configuring log files, 370
configuring points, 233
definition, 220
exporting, 229
file formats, 237
filenames, 236
importing, 230
notification when logging stops, 235
saving, 237
tag types recorded, 220
382
historical trending
switching to in PAC Display Runtime, 336
horizontal position
dynamic attritutes, 159
horizontal size
dynamic attritutes, 160
horizontal slider
dynamic attritutes, 161
hot keys
in alarms, 282
in SuperTrends, 200
I
I/O unit, communicating with, 320
Import Window menu item, 99, 373
importing
alarm points, 267
bitmap graphic, 108
GIF graphic, 110
historic logs, 230
JPEG graphic, 108, 109
PNG graphic, 108
installing PAC Display, 4
international characters, 377
J
JNG graphic
importing, 108
JPEG graphic
defined, 109
importing, 108, 109
K
keyboard
configuring
L
launch application dynamic attritute, 162
Launch TagInfoView Utility menu item, 183, 366
launching applications, 238, 370
notification, 242
trigger, 241
working directory, 240
legacy controllers, 61
line color
dynamic attritutes, 163
Line Color menu item, 107, 366
Line Style menu item, 107, 366
Line Width menu item, 107, 366
link redundancy
SoftPAC controller, 68
Lock Position menu item, 106, 365
log files
converting a SuperTrend log file, 212
decrypting, 317
discrete controller variables, 314
discrete I/O points, 314
encrypting, 317
Log Out of PAC Display Runtime menu item, 322,
375
logging operator actions, 314
login
expire password, 309
for Runtime, 306
log out user when idle, 305, 309
login schedule, 305, 308
requiring new password, 305
M
main window
options, 295
menu bar
hiding from operator, 301, 303
hiding in PAC Display Configurator, 36
menus
PAC Display Configurator, 355
PAC Display Runtime, 373
messages
Event Log, 318, 374
Event Log Viewer, 40, 326
Modify Alarm Points menu item, 332, 374
monitor-only version of PAC Display Runtime
features, 293
monitors, multiple
requirements, 5
using, 35, 48, 294
mouse
hot keys in alarms, 282
multiple dynamic attributes, 146
multiple instances of PAC Display Runtime, 69,
297
N
network redundancy, 67
New menu item, 94, 372
New Project menu item, 44, 355
notification
alarms, 272
application launched, 242
historic log files, 235
recipe download/upload, 261
O
objects
definition, 33
ODBC
configuring data source, 58
historic log database, 224
Runtime Operator Action Log database, 316
SuperTrend log database, 208
Opaque menu item
graphic, 368
line, 107
text, 120, 369
Open menu item
Configurator, 372
Runtime, 376
Open Project menu item
Configurator, 49, 355
Runtime, 49, 322, 374
operator
restricting activity, 301, 303
Operator Driven Attribute Access menu item, 313,
375
operator-driven attributes, 139
definition, 140
sub-attributes, 146
optimizing communications with control engine,
183
Opto 22 Product Support
contacting, 3
OptoOPCServer
using as remote scanner, 68
OptoTerm, using to download strategy, 26
OptoVersion, 346
383
383
P
PAC Display
Basic, 1
built-in graphics library, 110
Configurator
draw window, 37
hiding menu bar, 36
main window, 35
menus, 355
files, list of, 353
firmware requirements, 4
hardware requirements, 4
Professional, 1
differences from PAC Display Basic, 1
Runtime
definition, 31, 32
Event Log Viewer, 40
interacting with SuperTrends, 334
interacting with XY plots, 337
main window, 38
menus, 373
monitor-only version, 293
project options, 294
project window, 39
restricting the operator, 301, 303
running project, 33
setting date format, 297
system requirements, 4
PAC Term, 26
Password Protect Project menu item, 48, 356
passwords
protecting a project with, 48
Paste Dynamic Attributes menu item, 181, 365
Paste from File menu item, 109, 110, 363
Paste menu item, 112, 358
pasting
dynamic attributes, 182
graphic objects, 111
pens
configuring basic trend pens, 190, 192
configuring SuperTrend pens, 201
optimizing settings, 193
performance
and visual state of windows, 34
PID button, 120, 338
PID values, changing in Runtime, 340
planning a PAC Display project, 33
PNG graphic
defined, 109
384
pointer table, 76
pointer variable, using, 76
Print menu item (Configurator), 357
Print menu item (Runtime), 374
Printer Setup menu item, 357
printing, 374
displayed windows, 138
Priority Filter menu item, 375
project
closing, 52
combining projects, 57
components of, 33
copying, 356
creating, 44
customizing, 53
customizing startup
R
read and clear
dynamic attritutes, 165
real-time mode
switching to in PAC Display Runtime, 336
recipes
activating, 256
chart states, 254
download file, 246, 251, 253
downloading to a control engine, 154, 256
file formats, 252
format, 252
notification, 261
selecting a trigger, 260
upload file, 248
uploading from a control engine, 257
validating, 248, 251
Recipes menu item, 256, 257, 370
352, 372
relative offsets, 136
Replace menu item, 82, 358
Reset Dialog Positions menu item, 35, 366
rollover trigger option, 233
rotate
dynamic attritutes, 166
Rotate menu item, 361
rotating objects, 362
running a project, 28
Runtime, 338
login, 306
multiple Runtimes, 323
tooltips, 300
Runtime menu item, 294, 371
Runtime Operator Action Log database, 316
Runtime Operator Action Log File
configuring, 315, 316
decrypting, 317
encrypting, 314, 317
S
Save as Bitmap menu item, 111, 357
Save Metafile As menu item, 363
Save Project and Load Runtime menu item, 50,
356
Save Project As menu item, 50, 356
Save Project menu item, 50, 356
saving
graphic object as bitmap graphic, 111, 357
project, 50
scan rates
configuring, 184
scanner
configuring, 68
setting heartbeat interval, 73
using OptoOPCServer, 68
Scanner Defaults menu item, 74, 75, 371
Scanner Location menu item, 69, 74, 371
scanning, 183
optimizing, 183
refresh times, 370
Secondary Scanner Location menu item, 371
security
370
385
385
SuperTrends
configuring
pens, 201
settings, 195
x-axis, 196
y-axis, 197
converting log files, 211, 337
creating, 193
definition, 188
hot keys, 200
log files, 204
using in PAC Display Runtime, 334
zoom parameters, 199
Switch Control Engines menu item, 330, 376
Symbol Factory, 110
Sync Control Engine Time to PC menu item, 374
Synchronize Control Engine Clocks, 299
system requirements, 4
formatting, 119
in dynamic attritutes, 172
transparency with other objects, 120, 369
Text Style menu item, 369
title bar custom caption, 295
toolbox, 37, 100
hiding or showing, 365
tooltips, 300
graphic hint text, 145
Transparent menu item, 107, 368
Transparent menu item (text), 120, 369
trends
and system performance, 190
configuring
T
tables
creating, configuring, and displaying, 135
relative offsets, 136
writing to elements, 138, 337
tags
configuring, 75
correcting, 84
definition, 33
finding, 81
finding and replacing, 82
Replace menu item, 358
SNAP 32-channel digital modules, 77
SNAP high-density digital modules, 78
verifying, 372
viewing, 182
tags for Send String, 77
Technical Support. See Opto 22 Product Support,
3
text
adding, 119
changing
color, 369
font, 368
style, 368
color
172
editing, 119
386
U
Undo menu item, 357
Ungroup menu item, 106, 363
Unlock Position menu item, 106, 365
V
Validate Recipe File menu item, 252, 372
validating recipe files, 248, 251
verifying tags, 372
vertical position
dynamic attritutes, 175
vertical size
dynamic attritutes, 176
vertical slider
dynamic attritutes, 178
View Alarm Point Details menu item, 375
viewing alarms in PAC Display Runtime, 330
visibility/blink
dynamic attritutes, 179
W
Window State menu item, 244, 371
windows
and control system performance, 34
definition, 32
designing, 34
draw, 93, 372
dynamic attritutes, 180
main window options, 295
project, 39
states, 244
ways to use in a display, 33
Windows button, 120
Windows combo box, 124
Windows metafiles
importing, 109
Windows NT
modifying permissions in, 345
writing to table elements, 138, 337
X
XY plots, 188
and numeric tables, 213
configuring individual trend lines, 216
creating, 213
modifying, 214
using in PAC Display Runtime, 337
Z
Z-Order menu item, 115, 358
387
387
388